Add -z undefs option to the ELF linker.
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set H8300
25 @set HPPA
26 @set I960
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset I960
139 * i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset ARM
142 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset M68HC11
145 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset HPPA
148 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset M68K
151 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset MIPS
154 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC
157 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset POWERPC64
160 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset S/390
163 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset SPU
166 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset TICOFF
169 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset WIN32
172 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
173 @end ifset
174 @ifset XTENSA
175 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
176 @end ifset
177 @end ifclear
178 @ifclear SingleFormat
179 * BFD:: BFD
180 @end ifclear
181 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
182
183 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
184 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
185 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
186 * LD Index:: LD Index
187 @end menu
188 @end ifnottex
189
190 @node Overview
191 @chapter Overview
192
193 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
194 @cindex what is this?
195
196 @ifset man
197 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
198 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
199 @c man end
200
201 @c man begin SEEALSO
202 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
203 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
204 @file{ld}.
205 @c man end
206 @end ifset
207
208 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
209
210 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
211 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
212 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
213
214 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
215 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
216 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
217
218 @ifset man
219 @c For the man only
220 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
221 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
222 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
223 @end ifset
224
225 @ifclear SingleFormat
226 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
227 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
228 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
229 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
230 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
231 @end ifclear
232
233 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
234 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
235 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
236 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
237 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
238
239 @c man end
240
241 @node Invocation
242 @chapter Invocation
243
244 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
245
246 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
247 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
248 you have many choices to control its behavior.
249
250 @c man end
251
252 @ifset UsesEnvVars
253 @menu
254 * Options:: Command Line Options
255 * Environment:: Environment Variables
256 @end menu
257
258 @node Options
259 @section Command Line Options
260 @end ifset
261
262 @cindex command line
263 @cindex options
264
265 @c man begin OPTIONS
266
267 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
268 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
269 @cindex standard Unix system
270 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
271 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
272 link a file @code{hello.o}:
273
274 @smallexample
275 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
276 @end smallexample
277
278 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
279 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
280 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
281 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
282
283 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
284 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
285 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
286 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
287 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
288 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
289 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
290 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
291 noted in the descriptions below.
292
293 @cindex object files
294 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
295 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
296 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
297 an option and its argument.
298
299 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
300 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
301 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
302 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
303 message @samp{No input files}.
304
305 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
306 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
307 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
308 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
309 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
310 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
311 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
312 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
313 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
314 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
315 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
316
317 For options whose names are a single letter,
318 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
319 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
320 option that requires them.
321
322 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
323 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
324 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
325 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
326 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
327 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
328 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
329 output.
330
331 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
332 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
333 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
334 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
335 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
336 accepted.
337
338 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
339 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
340 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
341 compiler driver) like this:
342
343 @smallexample
344 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
345 @end smallexample
346
347 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
348 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
349 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
350 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
351 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
352 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
353 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
354
355 @smallexample
356 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
357 @end smallexample
358
359 Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
360 linker:
361
362 @table @gcctabopt
363 @include at-file.texi
364
365 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
366 @item -a @var{keyword}
367 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
368 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
369 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
370 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
371 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
372
373 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
374 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
375 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
376 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
377 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
378 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
379 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
380 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
381 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
382 interface.
383
384 @ifset I960
385 @cindex architectures
386 @kindex -A @var{arch}
387 @item -A @var{architecture}
388 @kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
389 @itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
390 In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
391 Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
392 @var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
393 the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
394 archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
395 family}, for details.
396
397 Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
398 other architecture families.
399 @end ifset
400
401 @ifclear SingleFormat
402 @cindex binary input format
403 @kindex -b @var{format}
404 @kindex --format=@var{format}
405 @cindex input format
406 @cindex input format
407 @item -b @var{input-format}
408 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
409 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
410 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
411 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
412 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
413 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
414 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
415 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
416 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
417 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
418 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
419 @xref{BFD}.
420
421 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
422 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
423 linking object files of different formats), by including
424 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
425 particular format.
426
427 The default format is taken from the environment variable
428 @code{GNUTARGET}.
429 @ifset UsesEnvVars
430 @xref{Environment}.
431 @end ifset
432 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
433 @code{TARGET};
434 @ifclear man
435 see @ref{Format Commands}.
436 @end ifclear
437 @end ifclear
438
439 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
440 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
441 @cindex compatibility, MRI
442 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
443 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
444 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
445 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
446 @ifclear man
447 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
448 @end ifclear
449 @ifset man
450 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
451 @end ifset
452 Introduce MRI script files with
453 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
454 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
455 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
456 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
457
458 @cindex common allocation
459 @kindex -d
460 @kindex -dc
461 @kindex -dp
462 @item -d
463 @itemx -dc
464 @itemx -dp
465 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
466 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
467 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
468 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
469 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
470
471 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
472 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
473 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
474 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
475 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
476 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
477 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
478 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
479 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
480 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
481
482 @cindex entry point, from command line
483 @kindex -e @var{entry}
484 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
485 @item -e @var{entry}
486 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
487 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
488 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
489 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
490 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
491 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
492 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
493 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
494
495 @kindex --exclude-libs
496 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
497 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
498 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
499 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
500 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
501 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
502 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
503 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
504 be treated as hidden.
505
506 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
507 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
508 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
509 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
510 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
511 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
512 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
513 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
514 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
515 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
516 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
517 regardless of this option.
518
519 @cindex dynamic symbol table
520 @kindex -E
521 @kindex --export-dynamic
522 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
523 @item -E
524 @itemx --export-dynamic
525 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
526 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
527 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
528 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
529 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
530
531 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
532 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
533 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
534 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
535
536 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
537 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
538 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
539 linking the program itself.
540
541 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
542 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
543 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
544
545 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
546 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
547 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
548
549 @ifclear SingleFormat
550 @cindex big-endian objects
551 @cindex endianness
552 @kindex -EB
553 @item -EB
554 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
555
556 @cindex little-endian objects
557 @kindex -EL
558 @item -EL
559 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
560 @end ifclear
561
562 @kindex -f @var{name}
563 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
564 @item -f @var{name}
565 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
566 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
567 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
568 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
569 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
570
571 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
572 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
573 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
574 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
575 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
576 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
577 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
578 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
579 machine specific performance.
580
581 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
582 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
583
584 @kindex -F @var{name}
585 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
586 @item -F @var{name}
587 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
588 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
589 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
590 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
591 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
592
593 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
594 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
595 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
596 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
597 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
598 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
599 @var{name}.
600
601 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
602 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
603 object files.
604 @ifclear SingleFormat
605 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
606 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
607 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
608 environment variable.
609 @end ifclear
610 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
611 creating an ELF shared object.
612
613 @cindex finalization function
614 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
615 @item -fini=@var{name}
616 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
617 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
618 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
619 the function to call.
620
621 @kindex -g
622 @item -g
623 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
624
625 @kindex -G @var{value}
626 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
627 @cindex object size
628 @item -G @var{value}
629 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
630 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
631 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
632 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
633 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
634
635 @cindex runtime library name
636 @kindex -h @var{name}
637 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
638 @item -h @var{name}
639 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
640 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
641 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
642 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
643 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
644 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
645
646 @kindex -i
647 @cindex incremental link
648 @item -i
649 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
650
651 @cindex initialization function
652 @kindex -init=@var{name}
653 @item -init=@var{name}
654 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
655 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
656 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
657 function to call.
658
659 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
660 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
661 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
662 @item -l @var{namespec}
663 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
664 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
665 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
666 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
667 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
668 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
669
670 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
671 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
672 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
673 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
674 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
675 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
676 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
677 @var{filename}.
678
679 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
680 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
681 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
682 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
683 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
684 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
685
686 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
687 archives multiple times.
688
689 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
690
691 @ifset GENERIC
692 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
693 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
694 behaviour of the AIX linker.
695 @end ifset
696
697 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
698 @kindex -L @var{dir}
699 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
700 @item -L @var{searchdir}
701 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
702 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
703 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
704 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
705 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
706 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
707 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
708 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
709 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
710 option is specified.
711
712 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
713 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
714 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
715
716 @ifset UsesEnvVars
717 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
718 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
719 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
720 @end ifset
721
722 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
723 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
724 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
725
726 @cindex emulation
727 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
728 @item -m @var{emulation}
729 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
730 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
731
732 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
733 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
734
735 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
736 configured.
737
738 @cindex link map
739 @kindex -M
740 @kindex --print-map
741 @item -M
742 @itemx --print-map
743 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
744 information about the link, including the following:
745
746 @itemize @bullet
747 @item
748 Where object files are mapped into memory.
749 @item
750 How common symbols are allocated.
751 @item
752 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
753 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
754 @item
755 The values assigned to symbols.
756
757 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
758 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
759 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
760 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
761 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
762 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
763 linker script containing:
764
765 @smallexample
766 foo = 1
767 foo = foo * 4
768 foo = foo + 8
769 @end smallexample
770
771 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
772 option is used:
773
774 @smallexample
775 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
776 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
777 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
778 @end smallexample
779
780 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
781 scripts.
782 @end itemize
783
784 @kindex -n
785 @cindex read-only text
786 @cindex NMAGIC
787 @kindex --nmagic
788 @item -n
789 @itemx --nmagic
790 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
791 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
792 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
793
794 @kindex -N
795 @kindex --omagic
796 @cindex read/write from cmd line
797 @cindex OMAGIC
798 @item -N
799 @itemx --omagic
800 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
801 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
804 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
805 specification published by Microsoft.
806
807 @kindex --no-omagic
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item --no-omagic
810 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
811 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
812 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
813 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
814
815 @kindex -o @var{output}
816 @kindex --output=@var{output}
817 @cindex naming the output file
818 @item -o @var{output}
819 @itemx --output=@var{output}
820 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
821 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
822 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
823
824 @kindex -O @var{level}
825 @cindex generating optimized output
826 @item -O @var{level}
827 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
828 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
829 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
830 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
831 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
832 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
833 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
834
835 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
836 @item -plugin @var{name}
837 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
838 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
839 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
840 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
841 wish.
842
843 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
844 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
845 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
846 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
847 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
848 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
849 just copy in the newest one.
850
851 @kindex --push-state
852 @cindex push state governing input file handling
853 @item --push-state
854 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
855 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
856 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
857
858 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
859 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
860 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
861 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
862 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
863 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
864
865 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
866 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
867 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
868 something as follows:
869
870 @smallexample
871 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
872 @end smallexample
873
874 @kindex --pop-state
875 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
876 @item --pop-state
877 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
878 flags governing input file handling.
879
880 @kindex -q
881 @kindex --emit-relocs
882 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
883 @item -q
884 @itemx --emit-relocs
885 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
886 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
887 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
888 in larger executables.
889
890 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
891
892 @kindex --force-dynamic
893 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
894 @item --force-dynamic
895 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
896 to VxWorks targets.
897
898 @cindex partial link
899 @cindex relocatable output
900 @kindex -r
901 @kindex --relocatable
902 @item -r
903 @itemx --relocatable
904 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
905 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
906 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
907 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
908 @code{OMAGIC}.
909 @c ; see @option{-N}.
910 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
911 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
912 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
913
914 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
915 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
916 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
917 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
918 with input files in other formats at all.
919
920 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
921
922 @kindex -R @var{file}
923 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
924 @cindex symbol-only input
925 @item -R @var{filename}
926 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
927 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
928 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
929 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
930 programs. You may use this option more than once.
931
932 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
933 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
934 the @option{-rpath} option.
935
936 @kindex -s
937 @kindex --strip-all
938 @cindex strip all symbols
939 @item -s
940 @itemx --strip-all
941 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
942
943 @kindex -S
944 @kindex --strip-debug
945 @cindex strip debugger symbols
946 @item -S
947 @itemx --strip-debug
948 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
949
950 @kindex --strip-discarded
951 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
952 @item --strip-discarded
953 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
954 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
955 Enabled by default.
956
957 @kindex -t
958 @kindex --trace
959 @cindex input files, displaying
960 @item -t
961 @itemx --trace
962 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
963
964 @kindex -T @var{script}
965 @kindex --script=@var{script}
966 @cindex script files
967 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
968 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
969 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
970 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
971 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
972 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
973 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
974 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
975 options accumulate.
976
977 @kindex -dT @var{script}
978 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
979 @cindex script files
980 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
981 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
982 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
983
984 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
985 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
986 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
987 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
988 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
989 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
990 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
991 @samp{gcc}).
992
993 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
994 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
995 @cindex undefined symbol
996 @item -u @var{symbol}
997 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
998 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
999 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1000 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1001 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1002 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1003
1004 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1005 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1006 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1007 instead.
1008
1009 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex symbols, require defined
1011 @cindex defined symbol
1012 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1013 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1014 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1015 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1016 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1017 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1018 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1019
1020 @kindex -Ur
1021 @cindex constructors
1022 @item -Ur
1023 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1024 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1025 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1026 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1027 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1028 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1029 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1030 @samp{-r} for the others.
1031
1032 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1033 @cindex orphan sections
1034 @cindex sections, orphan
1035 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1036 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1037 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1038
1039 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1040
1041 @table @code
1042 @item place
1043 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1044 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1045 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1046
1047 @item discard
1048 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1049 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1050
1051 @item warn
1052 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1053 issue a warning.
1054
1055 @item error
1056 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1057 @end table
1058
1059 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1060
1061 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1062 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1063 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1064 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1065 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1066 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1067 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1068 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1069 in a linker script.
1070
1071 @kindex -v
1072 @kindex -V
1073 @kindex --version
1074 @cindex version
1075 @item -v
1076 @itemx --version
1077 @itemx -V
1078 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1079 lists the supported emulations.
1080
1081 @kindex -x
1082 @kindex --discard-all
1083 @cindex deleting local symbols
1084 @item -x
1085 @itemx --discard-all
1086 Delete all local symbols.
1087
1088 @kindex -X
1089 @kindex --discard-locals
1090 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1091 @item -X
1092 @itemx --discard-locals
1093 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1094 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1095 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1096
1097 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1098 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1099 @cindex symbol tracing
1100 @item -y @var{symbol}
1101 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1102 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1103 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1104 to prepend an underscore.
1105
1106 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1107 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1108
1109 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1110 @item -Y @var{path}
1111 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1112 for Solaris compatibility.
1113
1114 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1115 @item -z @var{keyword}
1116 The recognized keywords are:
1117 @table @samp
1118
1119 @item bndplt
1120 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1121
1122 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1123 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1124 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1125 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1126 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1127 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1128 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1129 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1130 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1131 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1132 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1133
1134 @item combreloc
1135 @itemx nocombreloc
1136 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1137 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1138
1139 @item common
1140 @itemx nocommon
1141 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1142 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1143
1144 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1145 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1146 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1147 using pages of this size.
1148
1149 @item defs
1150 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1151 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1152 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1153
1154 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1155 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1156 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1157 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1158 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1159 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1160 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1161 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1162 these options.
1163
1164 @item execstack
1165 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1166
1167 @item global
1168 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1169 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1170 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1171
1172 @item globalaudit
1173 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1174 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1175 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1176 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1177 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command line options be run for
1178 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1179
1180 @item ibtplt
1181 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1182 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1183
1184 @item ibt
1185 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1186 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1187 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1188
1189 @item initfirst
1190 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1191 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1192 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1193 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1194 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1195 objects.
1196
1197 @item interpose
1198 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1199 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1200 libraries not so marked.
1201
1202 @item lazy
1203 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1204 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1205 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1206 Lazy binding is the default.
1207
1208 @item loadfltr
1209 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1210
1211 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1212 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1213
1214 @item muldefs
1215 Allow multiple definitions.
1216
1217 @item nocopyreloc
1218 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1219 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1220
1221 @item nodefaultlib
1222 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1223 should ignore any default library search paths.
1224
1225 @item nodelete
1226 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1227
1228 @item nodlopen
1229 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1230
1231 @item nodump
1232 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1233
1234 @item noexecstack
1235 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1236
1237 @item noextern-protected-data
1238 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1239 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1240 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1241 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1242 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1243 i386 and x86-64.
1244
1245 @item noreloc-overflow
1246 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1247 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1248 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1249
1250 @item now
1251 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1252 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1253 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1254 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1255 called.
1256
1257 @item origin
1258 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1259
1260 @item relro
1261 @itemx norelro
1262 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1263 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1264 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1265 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1266 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1267
1268 @item separate-code
1269 @itemx noseparate-code
1270 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1271 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1272 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1273 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1274
1275 @item shstk
1276 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1277 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1278 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1279
1280 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1281 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1282 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1283 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1284
1285 @item text
1286 @itemx notext
1287 @itemx textoff
1288 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1289 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1290 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1291
1292 @item undefs
1293 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1294 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1295 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1296
1297 @end table
1298
1299 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1300
1301 @kindex -(
1302 @cindex groups of archives
1303 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1304 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1305 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1306 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1307
1308 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1309 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1310 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1311 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1312 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1313 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1314 they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1315 resolved.
1316
1317 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1318 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1319 more archives.
1320
1321 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1322 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1323 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1324 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1325 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1326 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1327 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1328 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1329 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1330 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1331 restore the old behaviour.
1332
1333 @kindex --as-needed
1334 @kindex --no-as-needed
1335 @item --as-needed
1336 @itemx --no-as-needed
1337 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1338 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1339 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1340 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1341 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1342 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1343 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1344 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1345 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1346 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1347 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1348 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1349 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1350
1351 @kindex --add-needed
1352 @kindex --no-add-needed
1353 @item --add-needed
1354 @itemx --no-add-needed
1355 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1356 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1357 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1358 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1359
1360 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1361 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1362 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1363
1364 @kindex -Bdynamic
1365 @kindex -dy
1366 @kindex -call_shared
1367 @item -Bdynamic
1368 @itemx -dy
1369 @itemx -call_shared
1370 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1371 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1372 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1373 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1374 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1375 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1376
1377 @kindex -Bgroup
1378 @item -Bgroup
1379 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1380 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1381 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1382 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1383 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1384
1385 @kindex -Bstatic
1386 @kindex -dn
1387 @kindex -non_shared
1388 @kindex -static
1389 @item -Bstatic
1390 @itemx -dn
1391 @itemx -non_shared
1392 @itemx -static
1393 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1394 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1395 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1396 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1397 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1398 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1399 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1400 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1401 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1402 libraries.
1403
1404 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1405 @item -Bsymbolic
1406 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1407 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1408 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1409 within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1410 @option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1411 executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1412 the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1413 support shared libraries and position independent executables.
1414
1415 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1416 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1417 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1418 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1419 This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1420 when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1421 to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
1422 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1423 libraries and position independent executables.
1424
1425 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1426 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1427 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1428 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1429 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1430 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1431 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1432 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1433 which support shared libraries.
1434
1435 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1436 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1437
1438 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1439 @item --dynamic-list-data
1440 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1441
1442 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1443 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1444 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1445 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1446
1447 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1448 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1449 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1450
1451 @kindex --check-sections
1452 @kindex --no-check-sections
1453 @item --check-sections
1454 @itemx --no-check-sections
1455 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1456 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1457 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1458 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1459 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1460 restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1461 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1462 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1463 option.
1464
1465 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1466 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1467 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1468 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1469 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1470 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1471 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1472 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1473 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1474 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1475 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1476 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1477
1478 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1479 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1480 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1481 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1482 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1483 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1484 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1485 symbols.
1486
1487 @cindex cross reference table
1488 @kindex --cref
1489 @item --cref
1490 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1491 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1492 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1493
1494 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1495 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1496 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1497 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1498 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1499 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1500 symbol are listed.
1501
1502 @cindex common allocation
1503 @kindex --no-define-common
1504 @item --no-define-common
1505 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1506 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1507 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1508
1509 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1510 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1511 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1512 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1513 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1514 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1515 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1516 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1517 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1518 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1519
1520 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1521 @cindex section groups
1522 @cindex COMDAT
1523 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1524 @item --force-group-allocation
1525 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1526 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1527 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1528 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1529 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1530 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1531
1532 @cindex symbols, from command line
1533 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1534 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1535 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1536 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1537 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1538 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1539 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1540 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1541 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1542 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1543 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1544 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1545
1546 @cindex demangling, from command line
1547 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1548 @kindex --no-demangle
1549 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1550 @itemx --no-demangle
1551 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1552 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1553 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1554 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1555 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1556 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1557 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1558 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1559 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1560
1561 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1562 @kindex -I@var{file}
1563 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1564 @item -I@var{file}
1565 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1566 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1567 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1568 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1569 doing.
1570
1571 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1572 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1573 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1574 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1575 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1576 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1577
1578 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1579 @item --embedded-relocs
1580 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1581 that the relocs are stored in a target specific section. This option
1582 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1583 targets.
1584
1585 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1586 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1587 @item --fatal-warnings
1588 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1589 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1590 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1591
1592 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1593 @item --force-exe-suffix
1594 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1595
1596 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1597 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1598 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1599 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1600 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1601 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1602
1603 @kindex --gc-sections
1604 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1605 @cindex garbage collection
1606 @item --gc-sections
1607 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1608 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1609 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1610 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1611 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1612 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1613 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1614
1615 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1616 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1617 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1618 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1619 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1620 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1621 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1622 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1623 relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1624
1625 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1626 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1627 specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1628 a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1629
1630 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1631 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1632 @cindex garbage collection
1633 @item --print-gc-sections
1634 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1635 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1636 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1637 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1638 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1639 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1640 line.
1641
1642 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1643 @cindex garbage collection
1644 @item --gc-keep-exported
1645 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1646 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1647 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1648 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1649 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1650 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1651 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1652 ELF format targets.
1653
1654 @kindex --print-output-format
1655 @cindex output format
1656 @item --print-output-format
1657 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1658 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1659 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1660
1661 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1662 @cindex memory usage
1663 @item --print-memory-usage
1664 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1665 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1666 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1667 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1668 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1669
1670 @smallexample
1671 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1672 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1673 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1674 @end smallexample
1675
1676 @cindex help
1677 @cindex usage
1678 @kindex --help
1679 @item --help
1680 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1681
1682 @kindex --target-help
1683 @item --target-help
1684 Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1685
1686 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1687 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1688 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1689 @option{-M} option, above.
1690
1691 @cindex memory usage
1692 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1693 @item --no-keep-memory
1694 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1695 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1696 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1697 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1698 while linking a large executable.
1699
1700 @kindex --no-undefined
1701 @kindex -z defs
1702 @kindex -z undefs
1703 @item --no-undefined
1704 @itemx -z defs
1705 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1706 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1707 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1708 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1709 libraries being linked in.
1710
1711 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1712
1713 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1714 @kindex -z muldefs
1715 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1716 @itemx -z muldefs
1717 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1718 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1719 first definition will be used.
1720
1721 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1722 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1723 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1724 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1725 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1726 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1727 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1728 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1729 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1730
1731 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1732 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1733 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1734 a shared library.
1735
1736 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1737 libraries specified at link time are that:
1738
1739 @itemize @bullet
1740 @item
1741 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1742 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1743 resolvable at load time.
1744 @item
1745 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1746 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1747
1748 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1749 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1750 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1751 appropriate memset function.
1752 @end itemize
1753
1754 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1755 @item --no-undefined-version
1756 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1757 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1758 will be issued instead.
1759
1760 @kindex --default-symver
1761 @item --default-symver
1762 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1763 exported symbols.
1764
1765 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1766 @item --default-imported-symver
1767 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1768 imported symbols.
1769
1770 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1771 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1772 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1773 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1774 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1775 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1776 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1777 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1778 inappropriate.
1779
1780 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1781 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1782 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1783 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1784
1785 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1786 @item --no-whole-archive
1787 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1788 archive files.
1789
1790 @cindex output file after errors
1791 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1792 @item --noinhibit-exec
1793 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1794 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1795 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1796 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1797
1798 @kindex -nostdlib
1799 @item -nostdlib
1800 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1801 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1802 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1803
1804 @ifclear SingleFormat
1805 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1806 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1807 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1808 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1809 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1810 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1811 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1812 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1813 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1814 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1815 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1816 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1817 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1818 @end ifclear
1819
1820 @kindex --out-implib
1821 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1822 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1823 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1824 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1825 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1826 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1827 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1828 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1829
1830 @kindex -pie
1831 @kindex --pic-executable
1832 @item -pie
1833 @itemx --pic-executable
1834 @cindex position independent executables
1835 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1836 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1837 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1838 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1839 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1840 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1841
1842 @kindex -qmagic
1843 @item -qmagic
1844 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1845
1846 @kindex -Qy
1847 @item -Qy
1848 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1849
1850 @kindex --relax
1851 @cindex synthesizing linker
1852 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1853 @cindex --no-relax
1854 @item --relax
1855 @itemx --no-relax
1856 An option with machine dependent effects.
1857 @ifset GENERIC
1858 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1859 @end ifset
1860 @ifset H8300
1861 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1862 @end ifset
1863 @ifset I960
1864 @xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
1865 @end ifset
1866 @ifset XTENSA
1867 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1868 @end ifset
1869 @ifset M68HC11
1870 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1871 @end ifset
1872 @ifset NIOSII
1873 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1874 @end ifset
1875 @ifset POWERPC
1876 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1877 @end ifset
1878
1879 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1880 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1881 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1882 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1883 instructions, and combining constant values.
1884
1885 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1886 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1887 @ifset GENERIC
1888 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1889 family of processors.
1890 @end ifset
1891
1892 @ifset GENERIC
1893 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1894 but ignored.
1895 @end ifset
1896
1897 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1898 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1899
1900 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1901 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1902 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1903 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1904 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1905 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1906 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1907 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1908 @ifset GENERIC
1909 (such as VxWorks)
1910 @end ifset
1911 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1912 run-time memory.
1913
1914 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1915 or symbols needed for relocations.
1916
1917 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1918 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1919
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1922 @cindex runtime library search path
1923 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1924 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1925 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1926 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1927 them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
1928 also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1929 objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
1930 @option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
1931 ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1932 @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1933
1934 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1935 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1936 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1937 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1938 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1939 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1940 file systems.
1941
1942 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1943 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1944 the @option{-rpath} option.
1945 @end ifset
1946
1947 @ifset GENERIC
1948 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1949 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1950 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1951 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1952 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1953 of the input files.
1954
1955 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1956 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1957 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1958 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1959 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1960 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1961 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1962 appearing multiple times.
1963
1964 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1965 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1966 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
1967 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
1968 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
1969
1970 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
1971 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
1972 supported.
1973
1974 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1975 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1976 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1977 runtime linker would do.
1978
1979 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
1980 libraries:
1981 @enumerate
1982 @item
1983 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
1984 @item
1985 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1986 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1987 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1988 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
1989 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1990 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1991 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1992 @item
1993 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1994 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1995 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
1996 @item
1997 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1998 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
1999 @item
2000 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2001 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2002 @item
2003 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2004 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2005 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2006 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2007 @item
2008 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2009 @item
2010 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2011 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2012 @end enumerate
2013
2014 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2015 warning and continue with the link.
2016 @end ifset
2017
2018 @kindex -shared
2019 @kindex -Bshareable
2020 @item -shared
2021 @itemx -Bshareable
2022 @cindex shared libraries
2023 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2024 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2025 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2026 undefined symbols in the link.
2027
2028 @kindex --sort-common
2029 @item --sort-common
2030 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2031 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2032 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2033 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2034 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2035 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2036 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2037 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2038
2039 @kindex --sort-section=name
2040 @item --sort-section=name
2041 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2042 patterns in the linker script.
2043
2044 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2045 @item --sort-section=alignment
2046 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2047 patterns in the linker script.
2048
2049 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2050 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2051 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2052 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2053 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2054
2055 @kindex --split-by-file
2056 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2057 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2058 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2059 size of 1 if not given.
2060
2061 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2062 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2063 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2064 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2065 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2066 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2067 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2068 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2069 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2070 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2071 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2072 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2073
2074 @kindex --stats
2075 @item --stats
2076 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2077 as execution time and memory usage.
2078
2079 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2080 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2081 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2082 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2083 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2084
2085 @kindex --task-link
2086 @item --task-link
2087 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2088 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2089
2090 @kindex --traditional-format
2091 @cindex traditional format
2092 @item --traditional-format
2093 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2094 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2095 use the traditional format instead.
2096
2097 @cindex dbx
2098 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2099 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2100 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2101 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2102 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2103 combine duplicate entries.
2104
2105 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2106 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2107 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2108 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2109 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2110 line.
2111 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2112 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2113 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2114 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2115 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2116
2117 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2118 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2119 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2120 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2121 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2122 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2123 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2124 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2125 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2126
2127 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2128 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2129 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2130 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2131 byte of the text segment.
2132
2133 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2134 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2135 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2136 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2137 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2138 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2139
2140 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2141 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2142 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2143 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2144 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2145
2146 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2147 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2148 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2149 values for @samp{method}:
2150
2151 @table @samp
2152 @item ignore-all
2153 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2154
2155 @item report-all
2156 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2157
2158 @item ignore-in-object-files
2159 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2160 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2161
2162 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2163 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2164 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2165 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2166 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2167 command line.
2168 @end table
2169
2170 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2171 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2172
2173 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2174 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2175 can change this to a warning.
2176
2177 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2178 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2179 @item --dll-verbose
2180 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2181 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2182 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2183 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2184 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2185
2186 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2187 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2188 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2189 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2190 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2191 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2192 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2193 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2194 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2195 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2196 @xref{WIN32}.
2197
2198 @kindex --warn-common
2199 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2200 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2201 @item --warn-common
2202 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2203 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2204 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2205 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2206 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2207 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2208
2209 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2210
2211 @table @samp
2212 @item int i = 1;
2213 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2214 file.
2215
2216 @item extern int i;
2217 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2218 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2219 variable somewhere.
2220
2221 @item int i;
2222 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2223 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2224 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2225 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2226 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2227 a definition of the same variable.
2228 @end table
2229
2230 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2231 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2232 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2233 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2234 a common symbol.
2235
2236 @enumerate
2237 @item
2238 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2239 definition for the symbol.
2240 @smallexample
2241 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2242 overridden by definition
2243 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2244 @end smallexample
2245
2246 @item
2247 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2248 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2249 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2250 @smallexample
2251 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2252 overriding common
2253 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2254 @end smallexample
2255
2256 @item
2257 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2258 @smallexample
2259 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2260 of `@var{symbol}'
2261 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2262 @end smallexample
2263
2264 @item
2265 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2266 @smallexample
2267 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2268 overridden by larger common
2269 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2270 @end smallexample
2271
2272 @item
2273 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2274 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2275 encountered in a different order.
2276 @smallexample
2277 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2278 overriding smaller common
2279 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2280 @end smallexample
2281 @end enumerate
2282
2283 @kindex --warn-constructors
2284 @item --warn-constructors
2285 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2286 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2287 detect the use of global constructors.
2288
2289 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2290 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2291 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2292 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2293 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2294 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2295 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2296 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2297 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2298 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2299 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2300 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2301 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2302
2303 @kindex --warn-once
2304 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2305 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2306 @item --warn-once
2307 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2308 which refers to it.
2309
2310 @kindex --warn-section-align
2311 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2312 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2313 @item --warn-section-align
2314 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2315 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2316 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2317 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2318 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2319
2320 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2321 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2322 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2323
2324 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2325 @item --warn-alternate-em
2326 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2327
2328 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2329 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2330 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2331 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2332 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2333
2334 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2335 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2336 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2337 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2338
2339 @kindex --whole-archive
2340 @cindex including an entire archive
2341 @item --whole-archive
2342 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2343 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2344 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2345 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2346 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2347 library. This option may be used more than once.
2348
2349 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2350 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2351 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2352 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2353 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2354
2355 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2356 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2357 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2358 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2359 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2360 @var{symbol}.
2361
2362 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2363 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2364 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2365 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2366
2367 Here is a trivial example:
2368
2369 @smallexample
2370 void *
2371 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2372 @{
2373 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2374 return __real_malloc (c);
2375 @}
2376 @end smallexample
2377
2378 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2379 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2380 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2381 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2382
2383 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2384 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2385 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2386 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2387 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2388
2389 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2390 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2391 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2392 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2393 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2394 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2395 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2396
2397 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2398 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2399 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2400 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2401 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2402
2403 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2404 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2405 @item --enable-new-dtags
2406 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2407 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2408 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2409 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2410 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2411 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2412 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2413 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2414
2415 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2416 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2417 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2418 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2419 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2420 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2421 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2422
2423 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2424 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2425 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2426 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2427 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2428 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2429 hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2430
2431 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2432 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2433 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2434 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2435 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2436 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2437 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2438 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2439 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2440 compressed using zlib.
2441
2442 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2443 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2444 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2445 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2446 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2447 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2448
2449 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2450 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2451
2452 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2453 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2454 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2455 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2456
2457 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2458 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2459 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2460 @option{--help} option.
2461
2462 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2463 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2464 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2465 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2466 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2467 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2468
2469 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2470 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2471 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2472 has been used.
2473
2474 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2475 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2476
2477 @kindex --build-id
2478 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2479 @item --build-id
2480 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2481 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2482 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2483 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2484 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2485 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2486 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2487 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2488 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2489 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2490 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2491
2492 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2493 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2494 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2495 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2496 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2497 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2498
2499 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2500 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2501 @end table
2502
2503 @c man end
2504
2505 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2506
2507 @c man begin OPTIONS
2508
2509 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2510 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2511 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2512 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2513 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2514 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2515 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2516 object file).
2517
2518 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2519 support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2520 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2521 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2522
2523 @table @gcctabopt
2524
2525 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2526 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2527 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2528 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2529 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2530
2531 @kindex --base-file
2532 @item --base-file @var{file}
2533 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2534 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2535 @file{dlltool}.
2536 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2537
2538 @kindex --dll
2539 @item --dll
2540 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2541 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2542 file.
2543 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2544
2545 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2546 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2547 @item --enable-long-section-names
2548 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2549 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2550 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2551 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2552 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2553 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2554 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2555 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2556 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2557 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2558 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2559 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2560 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2561 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2562 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2563 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2564 image and not stripping symbols.
2565 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2566
2567 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2568 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2569 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2570 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2571 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2572 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2573 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2574 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2575 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2576 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2577 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2578 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2579 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2580 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2581 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2582 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2583 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2584 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2585
2586 @kindex --leading-underscore
2587 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2588 @item --leading-underscore
2589 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2590 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2591 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2592 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2593
2594 @cindex DLLs, creating
2595 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2596 @item --export-all-symbols
2597 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2598 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2599 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2600 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2601 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2602 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2603 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2604 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2605 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2606 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2607 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2608 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2609 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2610 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2611 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2612 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2613 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2614 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2615 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2616 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2617 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2618 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2619 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2620
2621 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2622 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2623 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2624 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2625 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2626
2627 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2628 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2629 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2630 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2631
2632 @kindex --file-alignment
2633 @item --file-alignment
2634 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2635 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2636 512.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @cindex heap size
2640 @kindex --heap
2641 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2642 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2643 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2644 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2645 committed.
2646 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2647
2648 @cindex image base
2649 @kindex --image-base
2650 @item --image-base @var{value}
2651 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2652 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2653 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2654 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2655 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2656 for dlls.
2657 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2658
2659 @kindex --kill-at
2660 @item --kill-at
2661 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2662 symbols before they are exported.
2663 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2664
2665 @kindex --large-address-aware
2666 @item --large-address-aware
2667 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2668 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2669 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2670 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2671 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2672 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2675 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2676 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2677 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2678 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2679 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2680 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2681
2682 @kindex --major-image-version
2683 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2684 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2685 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2686
2687 @kindex --major-os-version
2688 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2689 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2691
2692 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2693 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2694 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2695 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2696
2697 @kindex --minor-image-version
2698 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2699 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2700 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2701
2702 @kindex --minor-os-version
2703 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2704 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2705 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2706
2707 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2708 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2709 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2710 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2711
2712 @cindex DEF files, creating
2713 @cindex DLLs, creating
2714 @kindex --output-def
2715 @item --output-def @var{file}
2716 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2717 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2718 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2719 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2720 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2721 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2722
2723 @cindex DLLs, creating
2724 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2725 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2726 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2727 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2728 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2729 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2730 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2731 execution are avoided.
2732 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2733
2734 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2735 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2736 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2737 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2738 default.
2739 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2740
2741 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2742 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2743 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2744 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2745 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2746 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2747 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2748 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2749 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2750 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2751
2752 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2753 @item --enable-auto-import
2754 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2755 DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
2756 building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2757 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2758 to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2759 specification published by Microsoft.
2760
2761 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2762 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2763 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2764 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2765 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2766
2767 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2768 see this message:
2769
2770 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2771 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2772
2773 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2774 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2775 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2776 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2777 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2778 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2779 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2780 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2781 the warning, and exit.
2782
2783 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2784 data type of the exported variable:
2785
2786 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2787 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2788 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2789
2790 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2791 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2792 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2793 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2794
2795 @example
2796 extern type extern_array[];
2797 extern_array[1] -->
2798 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2799 @end example
2800
2801 or
2802
2803 @example
2804 extern type extern_array[];
2805 extern_array[1] -->
2806 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2807 @end example
2808
2809 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2810 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2811
2812 @example
2813 extern struct s extern_struct;
2814 extern_struct.field -->
2815 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2816 @end example
2817
2818 or
2819
2820 @example
2821 extern long long extern_ll;
2822 extern_ll -->
2823 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2824 @end example
2825
2826 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2827 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2828 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2829 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2830 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2831 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2832 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2833 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2834
2835 Original:
2836 @example
2837 --foo.h
2838 extern int arr[];
2839 --foo.c
2840 #include "foo.h"
2841 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2842 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2843 @}
2844 @end example
2845
2846 Solution 1:
2847 @example
2848 --foo.h
2849 extern int arr[];
2850 --foo.c
2851 #include "foo.h"
2852 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2853 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2854 volatile int *parr = arr;
2855 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2856 @}
2857 @end example
2858
2859 Solution 2:
2860 @example
2861 --foo.h
2862 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2863 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2864 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2865 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2866 #else
2867 #define FOO_IMPORT
2868 #endif
2869 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2870 --foo.c
2871 #include "foo.h"
2872 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2873 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2874 @}
2875 @end example
2876
2877 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2878 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2879 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2880 functions).
2881 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2882
2883 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2884 @item --disable-auto-import
2885 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2886 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2887 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2888
2889 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2890 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2891 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2892 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2893 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2894 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2895 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2896
2897 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2898 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2899 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
2900 DLLs.
2901 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2902
2903 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2904 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2905 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2906 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2907
2908 @kindex --section-alignment
2909 @item --section-alignment
2910 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2911 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2912 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2913
2914 @cindex stack size
2915 @kindex --stack
2916 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2917 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2918 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2919 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2920 committed.
2921 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2922
2923 @kindex --subsystem
2924 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2925 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2926 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2927 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2928 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2929 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2930 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2931 @var{which}.
2932 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2933
2934 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2935 of the PE file header:
2936 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2937
2938 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2939 @item --high-entropy-va
2940 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2941 (ASLR).
2942
2943 @kindex --dynamicbase
2944 @item --dynamicbase
2945 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2946 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2947 Vista for i386 PE targets.
2948
2949 @kindex --forceinteg
2950 @item --forceinteg
2951 Code integrity checks are enforced.
2952
2953 @kindex --nxcompat
2954 @item --nxcompat
2955 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2956 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2957
2958 @kindex --no-isolation
2959 @item --no-isolation
2960 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2961
2962 @kindex --no-seh
2963 @item --no-seh
2964 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2965 this image.
2966
2967 @kindex --no-bind
2968 @item --no-bind
2969 Do not bind this image.
2970
2971 @kindex --wdmdriver
2972 @item --wdmdriver
2973 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
2974
2975 @kindex --tsaware
2976 @item --tsaware
2977 The image is Terminal Server aware.
2978
2979 @kindex --insert-timestamp
2980 @item --insert-timestamp
2981 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2982 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2983 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2984 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
2985 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
2986 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2987 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
2988 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
2989 identically.
2990 @end table
2991
2992 @c man end
2993
2994 @ifset C6X
2995 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2996
2997 @c man begin OPTIONS
2998
2999 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3000 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3001 all executables use an index of 0.
3002
3003 @table @gcctabopt
3004
3005 @kindex --dsbt-size
3006 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3007 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3008 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3009 entries.
3010
3011 @kindex --dsbt-index
3012 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3013 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3014 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3015 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3016 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3017
3018 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3019 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3020 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3021
3022 @end table
3023
3024 @c man end
3025 @end ifset
3026
3027 @ifset M68HC11
3028 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3029
3030 @c man begin OPTIONS
3031
3032 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3033 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3034
3035 @table @gcctabopt
3036
3037 @kindex --no-trampoline
3038 @item --no-trampoline
3039 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3040 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3041 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3042
3043 @kindex --bank-window
3044 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3045 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3046 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3047 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3048 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3049
3050 @end table
3051
3052 @c man end
3053 @end ifset
3054
3055 @ifset M68K
3056 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3057
3058 @c man begin OPTIONS
3059
3060 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3061 when linking for 68K targets.
3062
3063 @table @gcctabopt
3064
3065 @kindex --got
3066 @item --got=@var{type}
3067 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3068 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3069 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3070 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3071
3072 @end table
3073
3074 @c man end
3075 @end ifset
3076
3077 @ifset MIPS
3078 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3079
3080 @c man begin OPTIONS
3081
3082 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3083 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3084 linking for MIPS targets.
3085
3086 @table @gcctabopt
3087
3088 @kindex --insn32
3089 @item --insn32
3090 @kindex --no-insn32
3091 @itemx --no-insn32
3092 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3093 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3094 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3095 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3096 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3097 possible.
3098
3099 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3100 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3101 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3102 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3103 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3104 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3105 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3106 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3107 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3108 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3109 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3110 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3111 an error.
3112
3113 @end table
3114
3115 @c man end
3116 @end ifset
3117
3118 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3119 @node Environment
3120 @section Environment Variables
3121
3122 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3123
3124 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3125 @ifclear SingleFormat
3126 @code{GNUTARGET},
3127 @end ifclear
3128 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3129
3130 @ifclear SingleFormat
3131 @kindex GNUTARGET
3132 @cindex default input format
3133 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3134 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3135 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3136 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3137 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3138 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3139 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3140 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3141 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3142 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3143 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3144 @end ifclear
3145
3146 @kindex LDEMULATION
3147 @cindex default emulation
3148 @cindex emulation, default
3149 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3150 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3151 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3152 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3153 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3154 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3155 linker was configured.
3156
3157 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3158 @cindex demangling, default
3159 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3160 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3161 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3162 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3163 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3164 options.
3165
3166 @c man end
3167 @end ifset
3168
3169 @node Scripts
3170 @chapter Linker Scripts
3171
3172 @cindex scripts
3173 @cindex linker scripts
3174 @cindex command files
3175 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3176 written in the linker command language.
3177
3178 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3179 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3180 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3181 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3182 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3183 described below.
3184
3185 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3186 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3187 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3188 to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3189 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3190
3191 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3192 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3193 default linker script.
3194
3195 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3196 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3197 Linker Scripts}.
3198
3199 @menu
3200 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3201 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3202 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3203 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3204 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3205 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3206 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3207 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3208 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3209 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3210 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3211 @end menu
3212
3213 @node Basic Script Concepts
3214 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3215 @cindex linker script concepts
3216 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3217 describe the linker script language.
3218
3219 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3220 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3221 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3222 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3223 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3224 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3225 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3226 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3227
3228 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3229 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3230 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3231 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3232 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3233 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3234 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3235 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3236 of debugging information.
3237
3238 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3239 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3240 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3241 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3242 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3243 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3244 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3245 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3246 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3247 RAM address would be the VMA.
3248
3249 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3250 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3251
3252 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3253 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3254 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3255 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3256 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3257 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3258 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3259
3260 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3261 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3262 option.
3263
3264 @node Script Format
3265 @section Linker Script Format
3266 @cindex linker script format
3267 Linker scripts are text files.
3268
3269 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3270 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3271 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3272 generally ignored.
3273
3274 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3275 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3276 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3277 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3278 file name.
3279
3280 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3281 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3282 to whitespace.
3283
3284 @node Simple Example
3285 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3286 @cindex linker script example
3287 @cindex example of linker script
3288 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3289
3290 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3291 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3292 memory layout of the output file.
3293
3294 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3295 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3296 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3297 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3298 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3299 your input files.
3300
3301 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3302 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3303 linker script which will do that:
3304 @smallexample
3305 SECTIONS
3306 @{
3307 . = 0x10000;
3308 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3309 . = 0x8000000;
3310 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3311 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3312 @}
3313 @end smallexample
3314
3315 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3316 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3317 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3318
3319 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3320 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3321 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3322 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3323 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3324 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3325 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3326
3327 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3328 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3329 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3330 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3331 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3332 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3333
3334 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3335 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3336 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3337
3338 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3339 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3340 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3341 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3342 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3343 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3344 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3345
3346 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3347 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3348 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3349 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3350 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3351 sections.
3352
3353 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3354
3355 @node Simple Commands
3356 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3357 @cindex linker script simple commands
3358 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3359
3360 @menu
3361 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3362 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3363 @ifclear SingleFormat
3364 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3365 @end ifclear
3366
3367 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3368 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3369 @end menu
3370
3371 @node Entry Point
3372 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3373 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3374 @cindex start of execution
3375 @cindex first instruction
3376 @cindex entry point
3377 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3378 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3379 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3380 @smallexample
3381 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3382 @end smallexample
3383
3384 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3385 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3386 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3387 @itemize @bullet
3388 @item
3389 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3390 @item
3391 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3392 @item
3393 the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3394 targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3395 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3396 @item
3397 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3398 @item
3399 The address @code{0}.
3400 @end itemize
3401
3402 @node File Commands
3403 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3404 @cindex linker script file commands
3405 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3406
3407 @table @code
3408 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3409 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3410 @cindex including a linker script
3411 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3412 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3413 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3414 10 levels deep.
3415
3416 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3417 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3418
3419 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3420 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3421 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3422 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3423 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3424 @cindex linker script input object files
3425 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3426 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3427
3428 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3429 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3430 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3431
3432 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3433 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3434
3435 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3436 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3437 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3438 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3439 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3440 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3441 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3442 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3443 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3444 @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3445
3446 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3447 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3448 @samp{-l}.
3449
3450 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3451 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3452 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3453
3454 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3455 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3456 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3457 @cindex grouping input files
3458 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3459 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3460 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3461 in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3462
3463 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3464 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3465 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3466 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3467 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3468 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3469 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3470 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3471 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3472 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3473 setting afterwards.
3474
3475 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3476 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3477 @cindex output file name in linker script
3478 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3479 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3480 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3481 Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3482 precedence.
3483
3484 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3485 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3486
3487 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3488 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3489 @cindex library search path in linker script
3490 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3491 @cindex search path in linker script
3492 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3493 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3494 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3495 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3496 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3497 the command line option are searched first.
3498
3499 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3500 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3501 @cindex first input file
3502 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3503 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3504 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3505 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3506 first file.
3507 @end table
3508
3509 @ifclear SingleFormat
3510 @node Format Commands
3511 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3512 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3513
3514 @table @code
3515 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3516 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3517 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3518 @cindex output file format in linker script
3519 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3520 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3521 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3522 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3523 line option takes precedence.
3524
3525 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3526 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3527 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3528 desired endianness.
3529
3530 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3531 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3532 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3533 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3534
3535 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3536 command:
3537 @smallexample
3538 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3539 @end smallexample
3540 This says that the default format for the output file is
3541 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3542 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3543 format.
3544
3545 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3546 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3547 @cindex input file format in linker script
3548 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3549 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3550 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3551 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3552 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3553 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3554 @end table
3555 @end ifclear
3556
3557 @node REGION_ALIAS
3558 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3559 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3560 @cindex region alias
3561 @cindex region names
3562
3563 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3564 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3565
3566 @smallexample
3567 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3568 @end smallexample
3569
3570 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3571 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3572 to memory regions. An example follows.
3573
3574 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3575 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3576 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3577 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3578 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3579 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3580 sections:
3581
3582 @itemize @bullet
3583 @item
3584 @code{.text} program code;
3585 @item
3586 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3587 @item
3588 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3589 @item
3590 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3591 @end itemize
3592
3593 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3594 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3595 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3596 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3597 @code{C}:
3598 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3599 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3600 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3601 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3602 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3603 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3604 @end multitable
3605 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3606 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3607 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3608 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3609
3610 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3611 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3612 memory layout:
3613 @smallexample
3614 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3615
3616 SECTIONS
3617 @{
3618 .text :
3619 @{
3620 *(.text)
3621 @} > REGION_TEXT
3622 .rodata :
3623 @{
3624 *(.rodata)
3625 rodata_end = .;
3626 @} > REGION_RODATA
3627 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3628 @{
3629 data_start = .;
3630 *(.data)
3631 @} > REGION_DATA
3632 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3633 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3634 .bss :
3635 @{
3636 *(.bss)
3637 @} > REGION_BSS
3638 @}
3639 @end smallexample
3640
3641 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3642 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3643 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3644 @table @code
3645 @item A
3646 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3647 @smallexample
3648 MEMORY
3649 @{
3650 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3651 @}
3652
3653 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3654 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3655 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3656 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3657 @end smallexample
3658 @item B
3659 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3660 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3661 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3662 @smallexample
3663 MEMORY
3664 @{
3665 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3666 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3667 @}
3668
3669 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3670 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3671 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3672 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3673 @end smallexample
3674 @item C
3675 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3676 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3677 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3678 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3679 @smallexample
3680 MEMORY
3681 @{
3682 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3683 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3684 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3685 @}
3686
3687 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3688 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3689 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3690 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3691 @end smallexample
3692 @end table
3693
3694 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3695 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3696 necessary:
3697 @smallexample
3698 #include <string.h>
3699
3700 extern char data_start [];
3701 extern char data_size [];
3702 extern char data_load_start [];
3703
3704 void copy_data(void)
3705 @{
3706 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3707 @{
3708 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3709 @}
3710 @}
3711 @end smallexample
3712
3713 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3714 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3715 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3716
3717 @table @code
3718 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3719 @kindex ASSERT
3720 @cindex assertion in linker script
3721 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3722 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3723
3724 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3725 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3726 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3727 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3728 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3729
3730 @smallexample
3731 .stack :
3732 @{
3733 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3734 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3735 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3736 @}
3737 @end smallexample
3738
3739 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3740 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3741 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3742
3743 @smallexample
3744 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3745 .stack :
3746 @{
3747 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3748 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3749 @}
3750 @end smallexample
3751
3752 will work.
3753
3754 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3755 @kindex EXTERN
3756 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3757 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3758 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3759 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3760 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3761 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3762
3763 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3764 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3765 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3766 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3767 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3768 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3769
3770 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3771 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3772 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3773 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3774 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3775 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3776
3777 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3778 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3779 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3780 @cindex section groups
3781 @cindex COMDAT
3782 This command has the same effect as the
3783 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3784 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3785 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3786 specified (@samp{-r}).
3787
3788 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3789 @kindex INSERT
3790 @cindex insert user script into default script
3791 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3792 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3793 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3794 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3795 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3796 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3797 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3798 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3799 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3800 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3801 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3802 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3803 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3804
3805 @smallexample
3806 SECTIONS
3807 @{
3808 OVERLAY :
3809 @{
3810 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3811 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3812 @}
3813 @}
3814 INSERT AFTER .text;
3815 @end smallexample
3816
3817 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3818 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3819 @cindex cross references
3820 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3821 references among certain output sections.
3822
3823 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3824 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3825 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3826 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3827 a function defined in the other section.
3828
3829 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3830 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3831 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3832 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3833 names.
3834
3835 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3836 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3837 @cindex cross references
3838 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3839 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3840
3841 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3842 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3843 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3844 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3845 must never call back.
3846
3847 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3848 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3849 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3850 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3851 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3852 names, not input section names.
3853
3854 @ifclear SingleFormat
3855 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3856 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3857 @cindex machine architecture
3858 @cindex architecture
3859 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3860 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3861 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3862 the @samp{-f} option.
3863 @end ifclear
3864
3865 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3866 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3867 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3868 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3869 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3870 @xref{Expression Section}.
3871 @end table
3872
3873 @node Assignments
3874 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3875 @cindex assignment in scripts
3876 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3877 @cindex variables, defining
3878 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3879 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3880
3881 @menu
3882 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3883 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3884 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3885 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3886 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3887 @end menu
3888
3889 @node Simple Assignments
3890 @subsection Simple Assignments
3891
3892 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3893
3894 @table @code
3895 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3896 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3897 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3898 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3899 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3900 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3901 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3902 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3903 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3904 @end table
3905
3906 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3907 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3908 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3909
3910 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
3911 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
3912
3913 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3914
3915 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3916
3917 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3918 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3919 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3920
3921 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3922 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3923
3924 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3925 assignments may be used:
3926
3927 @smallexample
3928 floating_point = 0;
3929 SECTIONS
3930 @{
3931 .text :
3932 @{
3933 *(.text)
3934 _etext = .;
3935 @}
3936 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
3937 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3938 @}
3939 @end smallexample
3940 @noindent
3941 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3942 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3943 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3944 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3945 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3946
3947 @node HIDDEN
3948 @subsection HIDDEN
3949 @cindex HIDDEN
3950 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3951 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3952
3953 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3954 @code{HIDDEN}:
3955
3956 @smallexample
3957 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3958 SECTIONS
3959 @{
3960 .text :
3961 @{
3962 *(.text)
3963 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3964 @}
3965 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3966 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3967 @}
3968 @end smallexample
3969 @noindent
3970 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3971
3972 @node PROVIDE
3973 @subsection PROVIDE
3974 @cindex PROVIDE
3975 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3976 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3977 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3978 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3979 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3980 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3981 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3982 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3983
3984 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3985 @smallexample
3986 SECTIONS
3987 @{
3988 .text :
3989 @{
3990 *(.text)
3991 _etext = .;
3992 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3993 @}
3994 @}
3995 @end smallexample
3996
3997 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3998 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3999 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4000 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4001 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4002 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4003
4004 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4005 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4006 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4007 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4008 hidden and won't be exported.
4009
4010 @node Source Code Reference
4011 @subsection Source Code Reference
4012
4013 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4014 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4015 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4016 symbol that does not have a value.
4017
4018 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4019 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4020 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4021 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4022 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4023 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4024 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4025 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4026
4027 @smallexample
4028 extern int foo;
4029 @end smallexample
4030
4031 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4032
4033 @smallexample
4034 _foo = 1000;
4035 @end smallexample
4036
4037 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4038 transformation has taken place.
4039
4040 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4041 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4042 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4043 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4044 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4045 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4046 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4047
4048 @smallexample
4049 int foo = 1000;
4050 @end smallexample
4051
4052 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4053 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4054 number 1000 is initially stored.
4055
4056 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4057 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4058 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4059 So:
4060
4061 @smallexample
4062 foo = 1;
4063 @end smallexample
4064
4065 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4066 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4067 address. Whereas:
4068
4069 @smallexample
4070 int * a = & foo;
4071 @end smallexample
4072
4073 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4074 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4075 the variable @samp{a}.
4076
4077 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4078 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4079 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4080
4081 @smallexample
4082 foo = 1000;
4083 @end smallexample
4084
4085 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4086 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4087 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4088 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4089 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4090
4091 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4092 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4093 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4094 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4095 linker script contains these declarations:
4096
4097 @smallexample
4098 @group
4099 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4100 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4101 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4102 @end group
4103 @end smallexample
4104
4105 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4106
4107 @smallexample
4108 @group
4109 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4110
4111 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4112 @end group
4113 @end smallexample
4114
4115 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4116 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4117 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4118
4119 @smallexample
4120 @group
4121 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4122
4123 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4124 @end group
4125 @end smallexample
4126
4127 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4128 operators.
4129
4130 @node SECTIONS
4131 @section SECTIONS Command
4132 @kindex SECTIONS
4133 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4134 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4135
4136 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4137 @smallexample
4138 SECTIONS
4139 @{
4140 @var{sections-command}
4141 @var{sections-command}
4142 @dots{}
4143 @}
4144 @end smallexample
4145
4146 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4147
4148 @itemize @bullet
4149 @item
4150 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4151 @item
4152 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4153 @item
4154 an output section description
4155 @item
4156 an overlay description
4157 @end itemize
4158
4159 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4160 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4161 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4162 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4163 the layout of the output file.
4164
4165 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4166 below.
4167
4168 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4169 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4170 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4171 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4172 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4173 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4174
4175 @menu
4176 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4177 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4178 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4179 * Input Section:: Input section description
4180 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4181 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4182 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4183 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4184 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4185 @end menu
4186
4187 @node Output Section Description
4188 @subsection Output Section Description
4189 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4190 @smallexample
4191 @group
4192 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4193 [AT(@var{lma})]
4194 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4195 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4196 [@var{constraint}]
4197 @{
4198 @var{output-section-command}
4199 @var{output-section-command}
4200 @dots{}
4201 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4202 @end group
4203 @end smallexample
4204
4205 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4206
4207 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4208 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4209 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4210 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4211 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4212
4213 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4214
4215 @itemize @bullet
4216 @item
4217 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4218 @item
4219 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4220 @item
4221 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4222 @item
4223 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4224 @end itemize
4225
4226 @node Output Section Name
4227 @subsection Output Section Name
4228 @cindex name, section
4229 @cindex section name
4230 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4231 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4232 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4233 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4234 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4235 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4236 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4237 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4238 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4239 commas must be quoted.
4240
4241 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4242 Discarding}.
4243
4244 @node Output Section Address
4245 @subsection Output Section Address
4246 @cindex address, section
4247 @cindex section address
4248 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4249 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4250 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4251
4252 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4253 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4254 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4255 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4256 contained within the output section.
4257
4258 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4259
4260 @itemize @bullet
4261 @item
4262 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4263 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4264 in that region.
4265
4266 @item
4267 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4268 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4269 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4270 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4271
4272 @item
4273 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4274 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4275 counter.
4276 @end itemize
4277
4278 @noindent
4279 For example:
4280
4281 @smallexample
4282 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4283 @end smallexample
4284
4285 @noindent
4286 and
4287
4288 @smallexample
4289 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4290 @end smallexample
4291
4292 @noindent
4293 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4294 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4295 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4296 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4297 input sections.
4298
4299 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4300 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4301 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4302 do something like this:
4303 @smallexample
4304 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4305 @end smallexample
4306 @noindent
4307 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4308 aligned upward to the specified value.
4309
4310 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4311 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4312 sections are ignored).
4313
4314 @node Input Section
4315 @subsection Input Section Description
4316 @cindex input sections
4317 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4318 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4319
4320 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4321 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4322 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4323 map the input files into your memory layout.
4324
4325 @menu
4326 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4327 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4328 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4329 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4330 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4331 @end menu
4332
4333 @node Input Section Basics
4334 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4335 @cindex input section basics
4336 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4337 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4338
4339 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4340 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4341
4342 The most common input section description is to include all input
4343 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4344 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4345 @smallexample
4346 *(.text)
4347 @end smallexample
4348 @noindent
4349 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4350 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4351 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4352 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4353 example:
4354 @smallexample
4355 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4356 @end smallexample
4357 @noindent
4358 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4359 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4360 placed inside the section list, for example:
4361 @smallexample
4362 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4363 @end smallexample
4364 @noindent
4365 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4366 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4367 more than one section, as described below.
4368
4369 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4370 @smallexample
4371 *(.text .rdata)
4372 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4373 @end smallexample
4374 @noindent
4375 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4376 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4377 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4378 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4379 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4380 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4381
4382 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4383 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4384 immediately following section, for example:
4385 @smallexample
4386 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4387 @end smallexample
4388 @noindent
4389 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4390 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4391 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4392 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4393 could be modified to:
4394 @smallexample
4395 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4396 @end smallexample
4397 @noindent
4398 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4399 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4400 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4401 @smallexample
4402 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4403 @end smallexample
4404
4405 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4406 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4407 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4408 @smallexample
4409 data.o(.data)
4410 @end smallexample
4411
4412 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4413 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4414
4415 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4416
4417 @smallexample
4418 @group
4419 SECTIONS @{
4420 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4421 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4422 @}
4423 @end group
4424 @end smallexample
4425
4426 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4427 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4428 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4429 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4430 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4431
4432 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4433 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4434 with no whitespace around the colon.
4435
4436 @table @samp
4437 @item archive:file
4438 matches file within archive
4439 @item archive:
4440 matches the whole archive
4441 @item :file
4442 matches file but not one in an archive
4443 @end table
4444
4445 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4446 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4447 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4448 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4449 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4450 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4451 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4452 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4453 command.
4454
4455 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4456 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4457 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4458 @smallexample
4459 data.o
4460 @end smallexample
4461
4462 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4463 and does not contain any wild card
4464 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4465 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4466 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4467 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4468 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4469 the archive search path.
4470
4471 @node Input Section Wildcards
4472 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4473 @cindex input section wildcards
4474 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4475 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4476 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4477 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4478 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4479
4480 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4481 pattern for the file name.
4482
4483 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4484
4485 @table @samp
4486 @item *
4487 matches any number of characters
4488 @item ?
4489 matches any single character
4490 @item [@var{chars}]
4491 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4492 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4493 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4494 @item \
4495 quotes the following character
4496 @end table
4497
4498 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4499 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4500 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4501 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4502 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4503 a @samp{/} character.
4504
4505 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4506 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4507 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4508
4509 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4510 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4511 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4512 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4513 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4514 @smallexample
4515 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4516 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4517 @end smallexample
4518
4519 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4520 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4521 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4522 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4523 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4524 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4525 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4526
4527 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4528 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4529 difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
4530 descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
4531 Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4532 reduce the amount of padding necessary.
4533
4534 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4535 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4536 difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4537 ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4538 encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4539
4540 @cindex SORT
4541 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4542
4543 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4544 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4545
4546 @enumerate
4547 @item
4548 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4549 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4550 sections have the same name.
4551 @item
4552 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4553 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4554 sections have the same alignment.
4555 @item
4556 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4557 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4558 @item
4559 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4560 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4561 @item
4562 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4563 @end enumerate
4564
4565 When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4566 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4567 takes precedence over the command line option.
4568
4569 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4570 command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4571 treated as nested sorting command.
4572
4573 @enumerate
4574 @item
4575 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4576 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4577 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4578 @item
4579 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4580 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4581 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4582 @end enumerate
4583
4584 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4585 command line option will be ignored.
4586
4587 @cindex SORT_NONE
4588 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4589 section sorting option.
4590
4591 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4592 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4593 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4594
4595 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4596 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4597 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4598 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4599 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4600 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4601 @smallexample
4602 @group
4603 SECTIONS @{
4604 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4605 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4606 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4607 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4608 @}
4609 @end group
4610 @end smallexample
4611
4612 @node Input Section Common
4613 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4614 @cindex common symbol placement
4615 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4616 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4617 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4618 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4619 named @samp{COMMON}.
4620
4621 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4622 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4623 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4624 input files are placed in another section.
4625
4626 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4627 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4628 @smallexample
4629 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4630 @end smallexample
4631
4632 @cindex scommon section
4633 @cindex small common symbols
4634 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4635 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4636 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4637 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4638 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4639 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4640 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4641 locations.
4642
4643 @cindex [COMMON]
4644 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4645 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4646 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4647
4648 @node Input Section Keep
4649 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4650 @cindex KEEP
4651 @cindex garbage collection
4652 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4653 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4654 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4655 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4656 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4657
4658 @node Input Section Example
4659 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4660 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4661 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4662 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4663 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4664 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4665 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4666 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4667 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4668 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4669
4670 @smallexample
4671 @group
4672 SECTIONS @{
4673 outputa 0x10000 :
4674 @{
4675 all.o
4676 foo.o (.input1)
4677 @}
4678 @end group
4679 @group
4680 outputb :
4681 @{
4682 foo.o (.input2)
4683 foo1.o (.input1)
4684 @}
4685 @end group
4686 @group
4687 outputc :
4688 @{
4689 *(.input1)
4690 *(.input2)
4691 @}
4692 @}
4693 @end group
4694 @end smallexample
4695
4696 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4697 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4698 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4699 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4700 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4701 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4702 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4703
4704 @node Output Section Data
4705 @subsection Output Section Data
4706 @cindex data
4707 @cindex section data
4708 @cindex output section data
4709 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4710 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4711 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4712 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4713 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4714 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4715 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4716 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4717 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4718 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4719 counter.
4720
4721 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4722 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4723 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4724 stored.
4725
4726 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4727 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4728 @smallexample
4729 BYTE(1)
4730 LONG(addr)
4731 @end smallexample
4732
4733 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4734 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4735 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4736 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4737 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4738
4739 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4740 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4741 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4742 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4743 endianness of the first input object file.
4744
4745 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4746 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4747 @smallexample
4748 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4749 @end smallexample
4750 whereas this will work:
4751 @smallexample
4752 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4753 @end smallexample
4754
4755 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4756 @cindex holes, filling
4757 @cindex unspecified memory
4758 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4759 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4760 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4761 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4762 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4763 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4764 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4765 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4766 different parts of an output section.
4767
4768 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4769 value @samp{0x90}:
4770 @smallexample
4771 FILL(0x90909090)
4772 @end smallexample
4773
4774 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4775 section attribute, but it only affects the
4776 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4777 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4778 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4779 expression.
4780
4781 @node Output Section Keywords
4782 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4783 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4784 commands.
4785
4786 @table @code
4787 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4788 @cindex input filename symbols
4789 @cindex filename symbols
4790 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4791 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4792 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4793 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4794 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4795
4796 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4797 normally used for any other object file format.
4798
4799 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4800 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4801 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4802 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4803 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4804 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4805 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4806 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4807 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4808 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4809 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4810 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4811 ignored for other object file formats.
4812
4813 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4814 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4815 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4816 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4817 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4818 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4819 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4820 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4821 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4822 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4823 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4824 @code{exit}.
4825
4826 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4827 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4828 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4829 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4830 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4831 runtime code expects to see.
4832
4833 @smallexample
4834 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4835 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4836 *(.ctors)
4837 LONG(0)
4838 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4839 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4840 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4841 *(.dtors)
4842 LONG(0)
4843 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4844 @end smallexample
4845
4846 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4847 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4848 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4849 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4850 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4851 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4852 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4853 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4854
4855 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4856 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4857 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4858 scripts.
4859
4860 @end table
4861
4862 @node Output Section Discarding
4863 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4864 @cindex discarding sections
4865 @cindex sections, discarding
4866 @cindex removing sections
4867 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4868 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4869 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4870 @smallexample
4871 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4872 @end smallexample
4873 @noindent
4874 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4875 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4876 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4877 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4878 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4879 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4880 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4881 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4882 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4883
4884 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4885 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4886 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4887 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4888 section is discarded.
4889
4890 @cindex /DISCARD/
4891 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4892 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4893 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4894
4895 @node Output Section Attributes
4896 @subsection Output Section Attributes
4897 @cindex output section attributes
4898 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4899 like this:
4900
4901 @smallexample
4902 @group
4903 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4904 [AT(@var{lma})]
4905 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4906 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4907 [@var{constraint}]
4908 @{
4909 @var{output-section-command}
4910 @var{output-section-command}
4911 @dots{}
4912 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
4913 @end group
4914 @end smallexample
4915
4916 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4917 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4918 remaining section attributes.
4919
4920 @menu
4921 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
4922 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
4923 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
4924 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
4925 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
4926 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
4927 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4928 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4929 @end menu
4930
4931 @node Output Section Type
4932 @subsubsection Output Section Type
4933 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4934 parentheses. The following types are defined:
4935
4936 @table @code
4937 @item NOLOAD
4938 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4939 loaded into memory when the program is run.
4940 @item DSECT
4941 @itemx COPY
4942 @itemx INFO
4943 @itemx OVERLAY
4944 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4945 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4946 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4947 section when the program is run.
4948 @end table
4949
4950 @kindex NOLOAD
4951 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4952 @cindex loading, preventing
4953 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4954 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4955 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4956 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
4957 need to be loaded when the program is run.
4958 @smallexample
4959 @group
4960 SECTIONS @{
4961 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4962 @dots{}
4963 @}
4964 @end group
4965 @end smallexample
4966
4967 @node Output Section LMA
4968 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
4969 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
4970 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
4971 @cindex load address
4972 @cindex section load address
4973 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
4974 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4975 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4976 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4977 address is optional.
4978
4979 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4980 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4981 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4982 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4983 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
4984
4985 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
4986 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4987 load address:
4988
4989 @itemize @bullet
4990 @item
4991 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4992 the LMA address as well.
4993
4994 @item
4995 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4996
4997 @item
4998 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4999 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5000 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5001 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5002 the last section in the located region.
5003
5004 @item
5005 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5006 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5007
5008 @item
5009 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5010 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5011 @end itemize
5012
5013 @cindex ROM initialized data
5014 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5015 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5016 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5017 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5018 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5019 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5020 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5021 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5022 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5023
5024 @smallexample
5025 @group
5026 SECTIONS
5027 @{
5028 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5029 .mdata 0x2000 :
5030 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5031 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5032 .bss 0x3000 :
5033 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5034 @}
5035 @end group
5036 @end smallexample
5037
5038 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5039 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5040 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5041 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5042 script.
5043
5044 @smallexample
5045 @group
5046 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5047 char *src = &_etext;
5048 char *dst = &_data;
5049
5050 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5051 while (dst < &_edata)
5052 *dst++ = *src++;
5053
5054 /* Zero bss. */
5055 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5056 *dst = 0;
5057 @end group
5058 @end smallexample
5059
5060 @node Forced Output Alignment
5061 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5062 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5063 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5064 @cindex output section alignment
5065 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5066 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5067 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5068
5069 @node Forced Input Alignment
5070 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5071 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5072 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5073 @cindex input section alignment
5074 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5075 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5076 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5077
5078 @node Output Section Constraint
5079 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5080 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5081 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5082 @cindex constraints on output sections
5083 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5084 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5085 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5086 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5087
5088 @node Output Section Region
5089 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5090 @kindex >@var{region}
5091 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5092 @cindex memory regions and sections
5093 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5094 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5095
5096 Here is a simple example:
5097 @smallexample
5098 @group
5099 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5100 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5101 @end group
5102 @end smallexample
5103
5104 @node Output Section Phdr
5105 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5106 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5107 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5108 @cindex program headers and sections
5109 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5110 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5111 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5112 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5113 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5114 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5115
5116 Here is a simple example:
5117 @smallexample
5118 @group
5119 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5120 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5121 @end group
5122 @end smallexample
5123
5124 @node Output Section Fill
5125 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5126 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5127 @cindex section fill pattern
5128 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5129 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5130 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5131 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5132 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5133 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5134 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5135 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5136 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5137 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5138 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5139 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5140 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5141
5142 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5143 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5144
5145 Here is a simple example:
5146 @smallexample
5147 @group
5148 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5149 @end group
5150 @end smallexample
5151
5152 @node Overlay Description
5153 @subsection Overlay Description
5154 @kindex OVERLAY
5155 @cindex overlays
5156 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5157 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5158 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5159 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5160 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5161 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5162 than another.
5163
5164 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5165 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5166 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5167 command is as follows:
5168 @smallexample
5169 @group
5170 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5171 @{
5172 @var{secname1}
5173 @{
5174 @var{output-section-command}
5175 @var{output-section-command}
5176 @dots{}
5177 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5178 @var{secname2}
5179 @{
5180 @var{output-section-command}
5181 @var{output-section-command}
5182 @dots{}
5183 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5184 @dots{}
5185 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5186 @end group
5187 @end smallexample
5188
5189 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5190 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5191 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5192 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5193 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5194 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5195
5196 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5197 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5198
5199 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5200 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5201 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5202 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5203 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5204 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5205
5206 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5207 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5208 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5209 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5210 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5211
5212 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5213 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5214 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5215 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5216 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5217 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5218 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5219
5220 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5221 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5222
5223 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5224 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5225 @smallexample
5226 @group
5227 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5228 @{
5229 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5230 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5231 @}
5232 @end group
5233 @end smallexample
5234 @noindent
5235 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5236 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5237 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5238 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5239 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5240 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5241
5242 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5243 like the following.
5244
5245 @smallexample
5246 @group
5247 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5248 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5249 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5250 @end group
5251 @end smallexample
5252
5253 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5254 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5255 example could have been written identically as follows.
5256
5257 @smallexample
5258 @group
5259 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5260 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5261 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5262 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5263 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5264 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5265 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5266 @end group
5267 @end smallexample
5268
5269 @node MEMORY
5270 @section MEMORY Command
5271 @kindex MEMORY
5272 @cindex memory regions
5273 @cindex regions of memory
5274 @cindex allocating memory
5275 @cindex discontinuous memory
5276 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5277 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5278
5279 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5280 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5281 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5282 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5283 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5284 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5285 around to fit into the available regions.
5286
5287 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5288 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5289 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5290 @code{MEMORY} is:
5291 @smallexample
5292 @group
5293 MEMORY
5294 @{
5295 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5296 @dots{}
5297 @}
5298 @end group
5299 @end smallexample
5300
5301 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5302 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5303 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5304 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5305 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5306 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5307 command.
5308
5309 @cindex memory region attributes
5310 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5311 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5312 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5313 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5314 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5315 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5316 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5317
5318 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5319 @table @samp
5320 @item R
5321 Read-only section
5322 @item W
5323 Read/write section
5324 @item X
5325 Executable section
5326 @item A
5327 Allocatable section
5328 @item I
5329 Initialized section
5330 @item L
5331 Same as @samp{I}
5332 @item !
5333 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5334 @end table
5335
5336 If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5337 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5338 attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5339 in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5340 attributes.
5341
5342 @kindex ORIGIN =
5343 @kindex o =
5344 @kindex org =
5345 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5346 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5347 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5348 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5349 @code{ORG}).
5350
5351 @kindex LENGTH =
5352 @kindex len =
5353 @kindex l =
5354 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5355 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5356 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5357 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5358
5359 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5360 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5361 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5362 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5363 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5364 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5365 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5366 region.
5367
5368 @smallexample
5369 @group
5370 MEMORY
5371 @{
5372 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5373 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5374 @}
5375 @end group
5376 @end smallexample
5377
5378 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5379 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5380 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5381 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5382 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5383 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5384 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5385 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5386 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5387
5388 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5389 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5390 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5391
5392 @smallexample
5393 @group
5394 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5395 @end group
5396 @end smallexample
5397
5398 @node PHDRS
5399 @section PHDRS Command
5400 @kindex PHDRS
5401 @cindex program headers
5402 @cindex ELF program headers
5403 @cindex program segments
5404 @cindex segments, ELF
5405 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5406 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5407 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5408 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5409
5410 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5411 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5412 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5413 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5414 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5415
5416 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5417 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5418 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5419 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5420 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5421
5422 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5423 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5424 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5425
5426 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5427 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5428
5429 @smallexample
5430 @group
5431 PHDRS
5432 @{
5433 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5434 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5435 @}
5436 @end group
5437 @end smallexample
5438
5439 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5440 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5441 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5442 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5443 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5444 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5445
5446 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5447 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5448 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5449 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5450 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5451 Section Phdr}.
5452
5453 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5454 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5455 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5456 contain the section.
5457
5458 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5459 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5460 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5461 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5462 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5463 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5464 segment at all.
5465
5466 @kindex FILEHDR
5467 @kindex PHDRS
5468 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5469 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5470 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5471 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5472 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5473 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5474 these keywords.
5475
5476 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5477 value of the keyword.
5478
5479 @table @asis
5480 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5481 Indicates an unused program header.
5482
5483 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5484 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5485 the file.
5486
5487 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5488 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5489
5490 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5491 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5492 found.
5493
5494 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5495 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5496
5497 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5498 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5499 ABI.
5500
5501 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5502 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5503
5504 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5505 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5506
5507 @item @var{expression}
5508 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5509 be used for types not defined above.
5510 @end table
5511
5512 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5513 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5514 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5515 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5516 output section attribute.
5517
5518 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5519 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5520 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5521 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5522 header.
5523
5524 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5525 headers used on a native ELF system.
5526
5527 @example
5528 @group
5529 PHDRS
5530 @{
5531 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5532 interp PT_INTERP ;
5533 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5534 data PT_LOAD ;
5535 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5536 @}
5537
5538 SECTIONS
5539 @{
5540 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5541 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5542 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5543 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5544 @dots{}
5545 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5546 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5547 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5548 @dots{}
5549 @}
5550 @end group
5551 @end example
5552
5553 @node VERSION
5554 @section VERSION Command
5555 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5556 @cindex symbol versions
5557 @cindex version script
5558 @cindex versions of symbols
5559 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5560 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5561 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5562 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5563 shared library.
5564
5565 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5566 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5567 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5568
5569 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5570 @smallexample
5571 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5572 @end smallexample
5573
5574 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5575 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5576 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5577 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5578 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5579 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5580 library.
5581
5582 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5583 examples.
5584
5585 @smallexample
5586 VERS_1.1 @{
5587 global:
5588 foo1;
5589 local:
5590 old*;
5591 original*;
5592 new*;
5593 @};
5594
5595 VERS_1.2 @{
5596 foo2;
5597 @} VERS_1.1;
5598
5599 VERS_2.0 @{
5600 bar1; bar2;
5601 extern "C++" @{
5602 ns::*;
5603 "f(int, double)";
5604 @};
5605 @} VERS_1.2;
5606 @end smallexample
5607
5608 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5609 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5610 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5611 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5612 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5613 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5614 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5615 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5616 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5617 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5618
5619 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5620 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5621 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5622
5623 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5624 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5625 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5626
5627 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5628 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5629 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5630 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5631 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5632 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5633 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5634 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5635 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5636
5637 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5638 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5639 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5640 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5641
5642 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5643 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5644 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5645 won't.
5646
5647 @smallexample
5648 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5649 @end smallexample
5650
5651 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5652 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5653 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5654 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5655 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5656 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5657 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5658 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5659 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5660 search for each symbol reference.
5661
5662 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5663 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5664 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5665 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5666 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5667 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5668 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5669 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5670 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5671
5672 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5673 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5674 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5675 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5676 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5677 @smallexample
5678 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5679 @end smallexample
5680 @noindent
5681 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5682 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5683 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5684 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5685 takes precedence over a version script.
5686
5687 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5688 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5689 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5690 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5691 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5692
5693 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5694 source file. Here is an example:
5695
5696 @smallexample
5697 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5698 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5699 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5700 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5701 @end smallexample
5702
5703 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5704 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5705 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5706 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5707
5708 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5709 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5710 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5711 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5712 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5713 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5714
5715 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5716 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5717 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5718 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5719
5720 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5721
5722 @smallexample
5723 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5724 @end smallexample
5725
5726 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5727 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5728 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5729 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5730 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5731
5732 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5733 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5734 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5735 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5736 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5737 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5738 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5739 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5740 expect when you upgrade.
5741
5742 @node Expressions
5743 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5744 @cindex expressions
5745 @cindex arithmetic
5746 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5747 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5748 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5749 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5750
5751 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5752
5753 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5754 expressions.
5755
5756 @menu
5757 * Constants:: Constants
5758 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5759 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5760 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5761 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5762 * Operators:: Operators
5763 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5764 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5765 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5766 @end menu
5767
5768 @node Constants
5769 @subsection Constants
5770 @cindex integer notation
5771 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5772 All constants are integers.
5773
5774 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5775 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5776 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5777 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5778 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5779 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5780
5781 @cindex scaled integers
5782 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5783 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5784 @cindex suffixes for integers
5785 @cindex integer suffixes
5786 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5787 constant by
5788 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5789 @ifnottex
5790 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5791 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5792 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5793 @end ifnottex
5794 @tex
5795 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5796 @end tex
5797 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5798 respectively. For example, the following
5799 all refer to the same quantity:
5800
5801 @smallexample
5802 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5803 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5804 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5805 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5806 @end smallexample
5807
5808 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5809 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5810
5811 @node Symbolic Constants
5812 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5813 @cindex symbolic constants
5814 @kindex CONSTANT
5815 It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5816 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5817
5818 @table @code
5819 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5820 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5821 The target's maximum page size.
5822
5823 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5824 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5825 The target's default page size.
5826 @end table
5827
5828 So for example:
5829
5830 @smallexample
5831 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5832 @end smallexample
5833
5834 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5835 supported by the target.
5836
5837 @node Symbols
5838 @subsection Symbol Names
5839 @cindex symbol names
5840 @cindex names
5841 @cindex quoted symbol names
5842 @kindex "
5843 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5844 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5845 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5846 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5847 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5848 @smallexample
5849 "SECTION" = 9;
5850 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5851 @end smallexample
5852
5853 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5854 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5855 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5856
5857 @node Orphan Sections
5858 @subsection Orphan Sections
5859 @cindex orphan
5860 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5861 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5862 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5863 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5864 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5865
5866 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5867 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5868 placed at the end of that output section.
5869
5870 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5871 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5872 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5873 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5874 one new output section.
5875
5876 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5877 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5878 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5879 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5880 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5881 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
5882 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
5883
5884 The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5885 (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5886 output sections an orphan is placed in.
5887
5888 @node Location Counter
5889 @subsection The Location Counter
5890 @kindex .
5891 @cindex dot
5892 @cindex location counter
5893 @cindex current output location
5894 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5895 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5896 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5897 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5898 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5899
5900 @cindex holes
5901 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5902 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
5903 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5904 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5905 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
5906
5907 @smallexample
5908 SECTIONS
5909 @{
5910 output :
5911 @{
5912 file1(.text)
5913 . = . + 1000;
5914 file2(.text)
5915 . += 1000;
5916 file3(.text)
5917 @} = 0x12345678;
5918 @}
5919 @end smallexample
5920 @noindent
5921 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5922 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5923 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5924 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
5925 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
5926 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5927
5928 @cindex dot inside sections
5929 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5930 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
5931 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5932 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5933 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5934 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5935
5936 @smallexample
5937 SECTIONS
5938 @{
5939 . = 0x100
5940 .text: @{
5941 *(.text)
5942 . = 0x200
5943 @}
5944 . = 0x500
5945 .data: @{
5946 *(.data)
5947 . += 0x600
5948 @}
5949 @}
5950 @end smallexample
5951
5952 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5953 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5954 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5955 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5956 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5957 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5958 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5959 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5960
5961 @cindex dot outside sections
5962 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5963 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5964 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5965
5966 @smallexample
5967 SECTIONS
5968 @{
5969 start_of_text = . ;
5970 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5971 end_of_text = . ;
5972
5973 start_of_data = . ;
5974 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5975 end_of_data = . ;
5976 @}
5977 @end smallexample
5978
5979 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5980 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5981 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5982 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5983 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5984 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5985 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5986 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5987 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5988 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5989 as follows:
5990
5991 @smallexample
5992 SECTIONS
5993 @{
5994 start_of_text = . ;
5995 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5996 end_of_text = . ;
5997
5998 start_of_data = . ;
5999 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6000 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6001 end_of_data = . ;
6002 @}
6003 @end smallexample
6004
6005 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6006 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6007 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6008 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6009 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6010 section. So you could write:
6011
6012 @smallexample
6013 SECTIONS
6014 @{
6015 start_of_text = . ;
6016 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6017 end_of_text = . ;
6018
6019 . = . ;
6020 start_of_data = . ;
6021 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6022 end_of_data = . ;
6023 @}
6024 @end smallexample
6025
6026 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6027 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6028
6029 @need 2000
6030 @node Operators
6031 @subsection Operators
6032 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6033 @cindex arithmetic operators
6034 @cindex precedence in expressions
6035 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6036 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6037 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6038 @ifnottex
6039 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6040 @smallexample
6041 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6042 (highest)
6043 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6044 2 left * / %
6045 3 left + -
6046 4 left >> <<
6047 5 left == != > < <= >=
6048 6 left &
6049 7 left |
6050 8 left &&
6051 9 left ||
6052 10 right ? :
6053 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6054 (lowest)
6055 @end smallexample
6056 Notes:
6057 (1) Prefix operators
6058 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6059 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6060 @end ifnottex
6061 @tex
6062 \vskip \baselineskip
6063 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6064 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6065 \hrule
6066 \halign
6067 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6068 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6069 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6070 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6071 \noalign{\hrule}
6072 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6073 &highest&&&&&\cr
6074 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6075 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6076 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6077 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6078 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6079 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6080 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6081 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6082 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6083 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6084 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6085 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6086 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6087 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6088 \hrule}
6089 @end tex
6090 @iftex
6091 {
6092 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6093 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6094 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6095 }
6096 @end iftex
6097 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6098
6099 @node Evaluation
6100 @subsection Evaluation
6101 @cindex lazy evaluation
6102 @cindex expression evaluation order
6103 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6104 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6105
6106 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6107 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6108 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6109 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6110
6111 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6112 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6113 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6114 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6115
6116 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6117 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6118 allocation.
6119
6120 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6121 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6122
6123 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6124 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6125 following
6126 @smallexample
6127 @group
6128 SECTIONS
6129 @{
6130 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6131 @{ *(.text) @}
6132 @}
6133 @end group
6134 @end smallexample
6135 @noindent
6136 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6137 address}.
6138
6139 @node Expression Section
6140 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6141 @cindex expression sections
6142 @cindex absolute expressions
6143 @cindex relative expressions
6144 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6145 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6146 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6147 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6148 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6149 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6150 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6151 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6152 operations.
6153
6154 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6155 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6156 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6157 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6158 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6159 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6160 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6161 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6162 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6163 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6164 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6165 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6166 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6167 everywhere.
6168
6169 In the following simple example,
6170
6171 @smallexample
6172 @group
6173 SECTIONS
6174 @{
6175 . = 0x100;
6176 __executable_start = 0x100;
6177 .data :
6178 @{
6179 . = 0x10;
6180 __data_start = 0x10;
6181 *(.data)
6182 @}
6183 @dots{}
6184 @}
6185 @end group
6186 @end smallexample
6187
6188 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6189 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6190 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6191 section in the second two assignments.
6192
6193 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6194 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6195
6196 @itemize @bullet
6197 @item
6198 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6199 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6200 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6201 @item
6202 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6203 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6204 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6205 @item
6206 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6207 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6208 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6209 before applying the operator.
6210 @end itemize
6211
6212 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6213
6214 @itemize @bullet
6215 @item
6216 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6217 @item
6218 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6219 @item
6220 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6221 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6222 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6223 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6224 but an absolute address otherwise.
6225 @item
6226 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6227 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6228 section as the relative operand(s).
6229 @item
6230 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6231 conversions) is an absolute address.
6232 @end itemize
6233
6234 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6235 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6236 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6237 section @samp{.data}:
6238 @smallexample
6239 SECTIONS
6240 @{
6241 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6242 @}
6243 @end smallexample
6244 @noindent
6245 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6246 @samp{.data} section.
6247
6248 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6249 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6250
6251 @node Builtin Functions
6252 @subsection Builtin Functions
6253 @cindex functions in expressions
6254 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6255 use in linker script expressions.
6256
6257 @table @code
6258 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6259 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6260 @cindex expression, absolute
6261 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6262 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6263 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6264 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6265
6266 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6267 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6268 @cindex section address in expression
6269 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6270 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6271 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6272 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6273 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6274 the other two will be absolute:
6275 @smallexample
6276 @group
6277 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6278 .output1 :
6279 @{
6280 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6281 @dots{}
6282 @}
6283 .output :
6284 @{
6285 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6286 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6287 @}
6288 @dots{} @}
6289 @end group
6290 @end smallexample
6291
6292 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6293 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6294 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6295 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6296 @cindex round up location counter
6297 @cindex align location counter
6298 @cindex round up expression
6299 @cindex align expression
6300 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6301 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6302 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6303 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6304 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6305 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6306
6307 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6308 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6309 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6310 input sections:
6311 @smallexample
6312 @group
6313 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6314 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6315 *(.data)
6316 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6317 @}
6318 @dots{} @}
6319 @end group
6320 @end smallexample
6321 @noindent
6322 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6323 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6324 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6325 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6326
6327 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6328
6329 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6330 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6331 @cindex section alignment
6332 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6333 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6334 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6335 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6336 value in that section.
6337 @smallexample
6338 @group
6339 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6340 .output @{
6341 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6342 @dots{}
6343 @}
6344 @dots{} @}
6345 @end group
6346 @end smallexample
6347
6348 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6349 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6350 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6351 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6352 section.
6353
6354 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6355 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6356 This is equivalent to either
6357 @smallexample
6358 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6359 @end smallexample
6360 or
6361 @smallexample
6362 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6363 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6364 @end smallexample
6365 @noindent
6366 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6367 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6368 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6369 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6370 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6371 bytes in the on-disk file.
6372
6373 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6374 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6375 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6376 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6377 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6378 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6379 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6380
6381 @noindent
6382 Example:
6383 @smallexample
6384 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6385 @end smallexample
6386
6387 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6388 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6389 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6390 evaluation purposes.
6391
6392 @smallexample
6393 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6394 @end smallexample
6395
6396 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6397 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6398 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6399 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6400 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6401 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6402 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6403 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6404 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6405 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6406 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6407 section alignment.
6408
6409 @smallexample
6410 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6411 @end smallexample
6412
6413 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6414 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6415 @cindex symbol defaults
6416 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6417 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6418 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6419 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6420 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6421 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6422 existed, its value is preserved:
6423
6424 @smallexample
6425 @group
6426 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6427 .text : @{
6428 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6429 @dots{}
6430 @}
6431 @dots{}
6432 @}
6433 @end group
6434 @end smallexample
6435
6436 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6437 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6438 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6439
6440 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6441 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6442 @cindex section load address in expression
6443 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6444 Section LMA}).
6445
6446 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6447 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6448 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6449 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6450
6451 @kindex MAX
6452 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6453 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6454
6455 @kindex MIN
6456 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6457 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6458
6459 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6460 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6461 @cindex unallocated address, next
6462 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6463 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6464 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6465 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6466
6467 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6468 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6469 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6470
6471 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6472 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6473 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6474 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6475 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6476 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6477 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6478 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6479 name.
6480
6481 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6482 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6483 @cindex section size
6484 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6485 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6486 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6487 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6488 @smallexample
6489 @group
6490 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6491 .output @{
6492 .start = . ;
6493 @dots{}
6494 .end = . ;
6495 @}
6496 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6497 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6498 @dots{} @}
6499 @end group
6500 @end smallexample
6501
6502 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6503 @itemx sizeof_headers
6504 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6505 @cindex header size
6506 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6507 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6508 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6509 choose, to facilitate paging.
6510
6511 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6512 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6513 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6514 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6515 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6516 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6517 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6518 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6519 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6520 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6521 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6522 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6523 @end table
6524
6525 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6526 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6527 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6528 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6529 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6530 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6531 linker will report an error.
6532
6533 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6534
6535 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6536 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6537 commands.
6538
6539 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6540 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6541 read. This can affect archive searching.
6542
6543 @ifset GENERIC
6544 @node Machine Dependent
6545 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6546
6547 @cindex machine dependencies
6548 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6549 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6550 functionality are not listed.
6551
6552 @menu
6553 @ifset H8300
6554 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6555 @end ifset
6556 @ifset I960
6557 * i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6558 @end ifset
6559 @ifset M68HC11
6560 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6561 @end ifset
6562 @ifset ARM
6563 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6564 @end ifset
6565 @ifset HPPA
6566 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6567 @end ifset
6568 @ifset M68K
6569 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6570 @end ifset
6571 @ifset MIPS
6572 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6573 @end ifset
6574 @ifset MMIX
6575 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6576 @end ifset
6577 @ifset MSP430
6578 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6579 @end ifset
6580 @ifset NDS32
6581 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6582 @end ifset
6583 @ifset NIOSII
6584 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6585 @end ifset
6586 @ifset POWERPC
6587 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6588 @end ifset
6589 @ifset POWERPC64
6590 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6591 @end ifset
6592 @ifset S/390
6593 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6594 @end ifset
6595 @ifset SPU
6596 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6597 @end ifset
6598 @ifset TICOFF
6599 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6600 @end ifset
6601 @ifset WIN32
6602 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6603 @end ifset
6604 @ifset XTENSA
6605 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6606 @end ifset
6607 @end menu
6608 @end ifset
6609
6610 @ifset H8300
6611 @ifclear GENERIC
6612 @raisesections
6613 @end ifclear
6614
6615 @node H8/300
6616 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6617
6618 @cindex H8/300 support
6619 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6620 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6621
6622 @table @emph
6623 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6624 @item relaxing address modes
6625 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6626 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6627 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6628 respectively.
6629
6630 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6631 @item synthesizing instructions
6632 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6633 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6634 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6635 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6636 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6637 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6638 top page of memory).
6639
6640 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6641 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6642 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6643 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6644 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6645 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6646 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6647
6648 @item bit manipulation instructions
6649 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6650 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6651 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6652 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6653 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6654 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6655 the top page of memory).
6656
6657 @item system control instructions
6658 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6659 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6660 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6661 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6662 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6663 the top page of memory).
6664 @end table
6665
6666 @ifclear GENERIC
6667 @lowersections
6668 @end ifclear
6669 @end ifset
6670
6671 @ifclear GENERIC
6672 @ifset Renesas
6673 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6674 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6675 @node Renesas
6676 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6677
6678 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6679 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6680 options are required for these chips.
6681 @end ifset
6682 @end ifclear
6683
6684 @ifset I960
6685 @ifclear GENERIC
6686 @raisesections
6687 @end ifclear
6688
6689 @node i960
6690 @section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6691
6692 @cindex i960 support
6693
6694 You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6695 specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6696 family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6697 incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6698 linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6699 libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6700 search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6701
6702 For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6703 well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6704 paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6705 the names
6706
6707 @smallexample
6708 @group
6709 try
6710 libtry.a
6711 tryca
6712 libtryca.a
6713 @end group
6714 @end smallexample
6715
6716 @noindent
6717 The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6718 two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6719
6720 You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6721 the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6722 use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6723 specifies a library.
6724
6725 @cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6726 @cindex relaxing on i960
6727 @command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6728 you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6729 @code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6730 them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6731 instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6732 instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6733 target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6734 not itself call any subroutines).
6735
6736 @ifclear GENERIC
6737 @lowersections
6738 @end ifclear
6739 @end ifset
6740
6741 @ifset ARM
6742 @ifclear GENERIC
6743 @raisesections
6744 @end ifclear
6745
6746 @ifset M68HC11
6747 @ifclear GENERIC
6748 @raisesections
6749 @end ifclear
6750
6751 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6752 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6753
6754 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6755
6756 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6757
6758 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6759 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6760
6761 @table @emph
6762 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6763 @item relaxing address modes
6764 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6765 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6766 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6767 respectively.
6768
6769 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6770 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6771 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6772
6773 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6774 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6775 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6776 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6777 @code{bset} instructions.
6778
6779 @end table
6780
6781 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6782
6783 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6784 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6785 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6786 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6787 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6788 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6789 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6790 point to the function trampoline.
6791
6792 @ifclear GENERIC
6793 @lowersections
6794 @end ifclear
6795 @end ifset
6796
6797 @node ARM
6798 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6799
6800 @cindex ARM interworking support
6801 @kindex --support-old-code
6802 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6803 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6804 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6805 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6806 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6807 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6808 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6809 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6810 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6811 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6812
6813 @cindex thumb entry point
6814 @cindex entry point, thumb
6815 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6816 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6817 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6818 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6819 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6820 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6821
6822 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6823 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6824 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6825 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6826 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6827 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6828
6829 @cindex BE8
6830 @kindex --be8
6831 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6832 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6833 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6834 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6835 little-endian code.
6836
6837 @cindex TARGET1
6838 @kindex --target1-rel
6839 @kindex --target1-abs
6840 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6841 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6842 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6843 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6844
6845 @cindex TARGET2
6846 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6847 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6848 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6849 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6850 @table @samp
6851 @item rel
6852 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6853 @item abs
6854 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6855 @item got-rel
6856 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6857 @end table
6858
6859 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6860 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6861 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6862 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6863 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6864 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6865
6866 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6867 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6868 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6869
6870 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6871 relocations are ignored.
6872
6873 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6874 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6875 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6876 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6877
6878 @smallexample
6879 TST rM, #1
6880 MOVEQ PC, rM
6881 BX Rn
6882 @end smallexample
6883
6884 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6885 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6886 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6887
6888 @cindex USE_BLX
6889 @kindex --use-blx
6890 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6891 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6892 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6893 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6894 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6895
6896 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6897 specify it if you are using that target.
6898
6899 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6900 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6901 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6902 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6903 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6904 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6905 the support code can read the intended values.
6906
6907 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6908 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6909 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6910 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6911 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6912 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6913
6914 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6915 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6916 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6917 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6918 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6919 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6920
6921 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6922 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6923 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6924 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6925 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6926 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6927 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6928
6929 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6930 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6931 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6932 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6933 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6934 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6935 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6936
6937 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6938 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6939 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6940
6941 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6942 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6943
6944 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6945 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6946 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6947 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6948 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6949 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6950 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6951 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6952
6953 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6954 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6955
6956 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6957 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6958 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6959 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6960 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6961
6962 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6963 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6964 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6965 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6966 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6967 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6968
6969 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6970 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6971
6972 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6973 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6974 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6975 occurs.
6976
6977 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6978 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6979 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6980 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6981 occurs.
6982
6983 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6984 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
6985 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6986 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6987 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6988 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6989 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6990 not be diagnosed.
6991
6992 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6993 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6994 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6995 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6996 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6997 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6998 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
6999
7000 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7001 @kindex --pic-veneer
7002 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7003 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7004 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7005 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7006
7007 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7008 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7009 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7010 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7011 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7012 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7013 controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7014 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7015 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7016 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7017 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7018 where they should be placed.
7019
7020 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7021 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7022 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7023 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7024 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7025 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7026 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7027 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7028 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7029 from the input sections.
7030
7031 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7032 @samp{N = +1}.
7033
7034 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7035 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7036 otherwise.
7037
7038 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7039 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7040 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7041 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7042
7043 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7044
7045 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7046 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7047 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7048 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7049
7050 Please contact ARM for further details.
7051
7052 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7053 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7054 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7055 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7056
7057 @kindex --long-plt
7058 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7059 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7060 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7061 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7062
7063 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7064 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7065 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7066 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7067
7068 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7069 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7070 Its start address must be set, either with the command line option
7071 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7072 veneers in memory.
7073
7074 @kindex --cmse-implib
7075 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7076 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7077 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7078 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7079 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7080
7081 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7082 @cindex Input import library
7083 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7084 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7085 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7086 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7087 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7088 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7089 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7090 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7091 specified.
7092
7093 @ifclear GENERIC
7094 @lowersections
7095 @end ifclear
7096 @end ifset
7097
7098 @ifset HPPA
7099 @ifclear GENERIC
7100 @raisesections
7101 @end ifclear
7102
7103 @node HPPA ELF32
7104 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7105 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7106 @kindex --multi-subspace
7107 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7108 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7109 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7110 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7111 multiple sub-spaces.
7112
7113 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7114 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7115 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7116 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7117 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7118 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7119 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7120 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7121 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7122 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7123 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7124 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7125 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7126 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7127 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7128 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7129
7130 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7131 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7132 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7133 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7134
7135 @ifclear GENERIC
7136 @lowersections
7137 @end ifclear
7138 @end ifset
7139
7140 @ifset M68K
7141 @ifclear GENERIC
7142 @raisesections
7143 @end ifclear
7144
7145 @node M68K
7146 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7147
7148 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7149 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7150 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7151 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7152 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7153 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7154 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7155 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7156 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7157 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7158 support such GOTs.
7159 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7160 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7161 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7162 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7163
7164 @ifclear GENERIC
7165 @lowersections
7166 @end ifclear
7167 @end ifset
7168
7169 @ifset MIPS
7170 @ifclear GENERIC
7171 @raisesections
7172 @end ifclear
7173
7174 @node MIPS
7175 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7176
7177 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7178 @kindex --insn32
7179 @kindex --no-insn32
7180 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7181 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7182 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7183 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7184 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7185 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7186
7187 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7188 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7189 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7190 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7191 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7192 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7193 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7194 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7195 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7196 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7197 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7198 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7199
7200 @ifclear GENERIC
7201 @lowersections
7202 @end ifclear
7203 @end ifset
7204
7205 @ifset MMIX
7206 @ifclear GENERIC
7207 @raisesections
7208 @end ifclear
7209
7210 @node MMIX
7211 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7212 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7213 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7214 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7215 can translate between the two formats.
7216
7217 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7218 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7219 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7220 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7221 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7222 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7223 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7224 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7225
7226 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7227 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7228 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7229 of a section.
7230
7231 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7232 are left out from an mmo file.
7233
7234 @ifclear GENERIC
7235 @lowersections
7236 @end ifclear
7237 @end ifset
7238
7239 @ifset MSP430
7240 @ifclear GENERIC
7241 @raisesections
7242 @end ifclear
7243
7244 @node MSP430
7245 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7246 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7247 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7248 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7249
7250 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7251 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7252
7253 @table @code
7254 @item @samp{.vectors}
7255 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7256
7257 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7258 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7259 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7260
7261 @item @samp{.infomem}
7262 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7263 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7264
7265 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7266 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7267 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7268
7269 @item @samp{.noinit}
7270 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7271
7272 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7273 @end table
7274
7275 @table @option
7276 @cindex MSP430 Options
7277 @kindex --code-region
7278 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7279 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7280 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7281 using this option.
7282
7283 @kindex --data-region
7284 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7285 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7286 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7287 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7288
7289 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7290 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7291 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7292 and @code{--data-region} options.
7293 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7294 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7295 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7296 @end table
7297
7298 @ifclear GENERIC
7299 @lowersections
7300 @end ifclear
7301 @end ifset
7302
7303 @ifset NDS32
7304 @ifclear GENERIC
7305 @raisesections
7306 @end ifclear
7307
7308 @node NDS32
7309 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7310 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7311 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7312 relaxes objects according to these options.
7313
7314 @table @code
7315 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7316 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7317
7318 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7319 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7320
7321 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7322 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7323
7324 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7325 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7326
7327 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7328 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7329
7330 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7331 Update the existing EX9 table.
7332
7333 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7334 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7335
7336 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7337 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7338
7339 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7340 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7341
7342 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7343 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7344 @end table
7345
7346 @ifclear GENERIC
7347 @lowersections
7348 @end ifclear
7349 @end ifset
7350
7351 @ifset NIOSII
7352 @ifclear GENERIC
7353 @raisesections
7354 @end ifclear
7355
7356 @node Nios II
7357 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7358 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7359 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7360
7361 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7362 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7363 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7364 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7365 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7366 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7367 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7368 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7369 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7370 larger than 256MB.
7371
7372 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7373 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7374 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7375 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7376 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7377 register as a temporary.
7378
7379 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7380 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7381 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7382
7383 @ifclear GENERIC
7384 @lowersections
7385 @end ifclear
7386 @end ifset
7387
7388 @ifset POWERPC
7389 @ifclear GENERIC
7390 @raisesections
7391 @end ifclear
7392
7393 @node PowerPC ELF32
7394 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7395 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7396 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7397 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7398 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7399 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7400 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7401 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7402 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7403 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7404 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7405 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7406 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7407
7408 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7409 @table @option
7410 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7411 @kindex --bss-plt
7412 @item --bss-plt
7413 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7414 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7415 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7416 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7417 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7418 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7419 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7420 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7421
7422 @kindex --secure-plt
7423 @item --secure-plt
7424 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7425 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7426 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7427 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7428 style BSS PLT.
7429
7430 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7431 @kindex --sdata-got
7432 @item --sdata-got
7433 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7434 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7435 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7436 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7437 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7438 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7439 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7440 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7441 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7442 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7443 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7444 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7445
7446 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7447 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7448 @item --emit-stub-syms
7449 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7450 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7451
7452 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7453 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7454 @item --no-tls-optimize
7455 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7456 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7457 disable the optimization.
7458 @end table
7459
7460 @ifclear GENERIC
7461 @lowersections
7462 @end ifclear
7463 @end ifset
7464
7465 @ifset POWERPC64
7466 @ifclear GENERIC
7467 @raisesections
7468 @end ifclear
7469
7470 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7471 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7472
7473 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7474 @table @option
7475 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7476 @kindex --stub-group-size
7477 @item --stub-group-size
7478 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7479 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7480 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7481 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7482 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7483 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7484 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7485 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7486 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7487 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7488 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7489 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7490 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7491 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7492
7493 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7494 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7495 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7496 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7497
7498 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7499 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7500 @item --emit-stub-syms
7501 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7502 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7503
7504 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7505 @kindex --dotsyms
7506 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7507 @item --dotsyms
7508 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7509 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7510 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7511 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7512 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7513 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7514 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7515 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7516 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7517 feature.
7518
7519 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7520 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7521 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7522 @item --save-restore-funcs
7523 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7524 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7525 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7526 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7527 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7528 link.
7529
7530 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7531 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7532 @item --no-tls-optimize
7533 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7534 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7535 disable the optimization.
7536
7537 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7538 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7539 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7540 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7541 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7542 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7543 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7544 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7545 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7546 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7547 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7548 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7549 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7550 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7551 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7552
7553 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7554 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7555 @item --no-opd-optimize
7556 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7557 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7558 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7559 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7560
7561 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7562 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7563 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7564 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7565 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7566 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7567 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7568
7569 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7570 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7571 @item --no-toc-optimize
7572 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7573 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7574 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7575 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7576 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7577 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7578 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7579 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7580 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7581 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7582 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7583 optimization.
7584
7585 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7586 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7587 @item --no-multi-toc
7588 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7589 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7590 where TOC
7591 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7592 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7593 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7594 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7595 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7596 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7597 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7598 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7599
7600 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7601 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7602 @item --no-toc-sort
7603 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7604 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7605 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7606 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7607 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7608 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7609 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7610 off this feature.
7611
7612 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7613 @kindex --plt-align
7614 @kindex --no-plt-align
7615 @item --plt-align
7616 @itemx --no-plt-align
7617 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7618 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7619 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7620 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7621 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7622 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7623 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7624
7625 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7626 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7627 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7628 @item --plt-static-chain
7629 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7630 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7631 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7632 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7633
7634 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7635 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7636 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7637 @item --plt-thread-safe
7638 @itemx --no-thread-safe
7639 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7640 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7641 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7642 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7643 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7644 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7645 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7646 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7647 default behaviour.
7648
7649 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7650 @kindex --plt-localentry
7651 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7652 @item --plt-localentry
7653 @itemx --no-localentry
7654 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7655 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7656 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7657 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7658 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7659 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7660 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7661 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7662 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7663 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7664 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7665 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7666 @end table
7667
7668 @ifclear GENERIC
7669 @lowersections
7670 @end ifclear
7671 @end ifset
7672
7673 @ifset S/390
7674 @ifclear GENERIC
7675 @raisesections
7676 @end ifclear
7677
7678 @node S/390 ELF
7679 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7680
7681 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7682 @table @option
7683
7684 @cindex S/390
7685 @kindex --s390-pgste
7686 @item --s390-pgste
7687 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7688 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7689 binaries marked that way.
7690 @end table
7691
7692 @ifclear GENERIC
7693 @lowersections
7694 @end ifclear
7695 @end ifset
7696
7697 @ifset SPU
7698 @ifclear GENERIC
7699 @raisesections
7700 @end ifclear
7701
7702 @node SPU ELF
7703 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7704
7705 @cindex SPU ELF options
7706 @table @option
7707
7708 @cindex SPU plugins
7709 @kindex --plugin
7710 @item --plugin
7711 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7712
7713 @cindex SPU overlays
7714 @kindex --no-overlays
7715 @item --no-overlays
7716 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7717 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7718 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7719 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7720
7721 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7722 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7723 @item --emit-stub-syms
7724 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7725 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7726
7727 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7728 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7729 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7730 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7731 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7732 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7733
7734 @cindex SPU local store size
7735 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7736 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7737 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7738 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7739 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7740
7741 @cindex SPU
7742 @kindex --stack-analysis
7743 @item --stack-analysis
7744 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7745 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7746 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7747 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7748 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7749 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7750 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7751 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7752 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7753 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7754 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7755 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7756 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7757 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7758 and calls will be given.
7759
7760 @cindex SPU
7761 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7762 @item --emit-stack-syms
7763 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7764 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7765 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7766 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7767 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7768 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7769 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7770 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7771 @end table
7772
7773 @ifclear GENERIC
7774 @lowersections
7775 @end ifclear
7776 @end ifset
7777
7778 @ifset TICOFF
7779 @ifclear GENERIC
7780 @raisesections
7781 @end ifclear
7782
7783 @node TI COFF
7784 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7785 @cindex TI COFF versions
7786 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7787 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7788 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7789 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7790 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7791 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7792
7793 @ifclear GENERIC
7794 @lowersections
7795 @end ifclear
7796 @end ifset
7797
7798 @ifset WIN32
7799 @ifclear GENERIC
7800 @raisesections
7801 @end ifclear
7802
7803 @node WIN32
7804 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7805
7806 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7807 See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
7808 command line options mentioned here.
7809
7810 @table @emph
7811 @cindex import libraries
7812 @item import libraries
7813 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7814 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7815 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7816 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7817 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7818 @samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7819
7820 @item exporting DLL symbols
7821 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7822 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7823
7824 @table @emph
7825 @item using auto-export functionality
7826 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7827 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7828 which is controlled by the following command line options:
7829
7830 @itemize
7831 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7832 @item --exclude-symbols
7833 @item --exclude-libs
7834 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7835 @item --version-script
7836 @end itemize
7837
7838 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7839 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7840 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7841 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7842 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7843 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7844 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7845 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7846
7847 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7848 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7849 if either of the following are true:
7850
7851 @itemize
7852 @item A DEF file is used.
7853 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7854 @end itemize
7855
7856 @item using a DEF file
7857 @cindex using a DEF file
7858 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7859 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7860 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7861 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7862 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7863
7864 @example
7865 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7866 @end example
7867
7868 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7869 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7870
7871 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7872
7873 @example
7874 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7875
7876 EXPORTS
7877 foo
7878 bar
7879 _bar = bar
7880 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7881 var1 DATA
7882 doo = foo == foo2
7883 eoo DATA == var1
7884 @end example
7885
7886 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7887 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7888 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7889 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7890 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7891 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7892 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7893 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7894 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7895
7896 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7897 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7898 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7899
7900 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7901 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7902 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7903 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7904
7905 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7906 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7907 non-default base address for the image.
7908
7909 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7910 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7911 filename specified on the command line.
7912
7913 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7914
7915 @example
7916 EXPORTS
7917 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7918 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7919 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7920 @end example
7921
7922 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7923 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7924 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7925 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7926 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7927 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7928 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7929
7930 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7931
7932 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7933 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7934 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7935 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7936 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7937
7938 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7939 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7940 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7941 @code{*_imp__foo}).
7942
7943 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7944 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7945 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7946 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7947 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7948 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7949 application will behave unexpectedly.
7950
7951 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7952 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7953 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7954 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7955 the DLL without an import library.
7956
7957 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7958 other DEF file statements
7959
7960 @cindex creating a DEF file
7961 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7962 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
7963
7964 @item Using decorations
7965 @cindex Using decorations
7966 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7967 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7968 declared as:
7969
7970 @example
7971 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7972 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7973 @end example
7974
7975 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7976 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7977 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7978 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7979
7980 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
7981 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
7982 instead:
7983
7984 @example
7985 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7986 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7987 @end example
7988
7989 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7990 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
7991 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7992 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
7993 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
7994 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7995 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
7996 information.
7997 @end table
7998
7999 @cindex automatic data imports
8000 @item automatic data imports
8001 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8002 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8003 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8004 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8005 code to these platforms, especially for large
8006 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8007 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8008 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8009 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8010 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8011 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8012 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8013 trigger the feature's use.
8014
8015 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8016 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8017
8018 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8019 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8020
8021 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8022 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8023 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8024 below.
8025
8026 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8027 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8028 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8029 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8030 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8031 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8032 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8033 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8034 references.
8035
8036 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8037 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8038 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8039 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8040 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8041 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8042 run without error on an older system.
8043
8044 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8045 enabled as needed.
8046
8047 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8048 @item direct linking to a dll
8049 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8050 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8051 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8052 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8053 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8054 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8055 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8056 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8057 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8058 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8059
8060 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8061 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8062 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8063 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8064 select the dll instead of an import library.
8065
8066
8067 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8068 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8069
8070 @example
8071 libxxx.dll.a
8072 xxx.dll.a
8073 libxxx.a
8074 xxx.lib
8075 cygxxx.dll (*)
8076 libxxx.dll
8077 xxx.dll
8078 @end example
8079
8080 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8081
8082 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8083 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8084 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8085 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8086 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8087
8088 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8089 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8090 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8091 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8092 could coexist on the same machine.
8093
8094 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8095 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8096 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8097
8098 @example
8099 bin/
8100 cygxxx.dll
8101 lib/
8102 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8103 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8104 @end example
8105
8106 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8107 done two ways:
8108
8109 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8110 @example
8111 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8112 @end example
8113
8114 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8115 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8116 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8117 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8118
8119 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8120 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8121 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8122 making the app/dll.
8123
8124 @example
8125 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8126 @end example
8127
8128 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8129
8130 @example
8131 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8132 @end example
8133
8134 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8135 perfectly legal
8136
8137 @example
8138 bin/
8139 cygxxx-5.dll
8140 lib/
8141 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8142 @end example
8143
8144 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8145 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8146 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8147
8148 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8149 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8150
8151 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8152 work with auto-imported data.
8153
8154 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8155 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8156 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8157 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8158 possible to do this without an import lib.
8159
8160 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8161 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8162 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8163 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8164
8165 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8166 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8167 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8168 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8169 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8170 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8171 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8172
8173 @item symbol aliasing
8174 @table @emph
8175 @item adding additional names
8176 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8177 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8178 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8179 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8180 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8181
8182 @example
8183 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8184
8185 EXPORTS
8186 foo
8187 _foo = foo
8188 @end example
8189
8190 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8191
8192 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8193 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8194
8195 @example
8196 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8197 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8198 @end example
8199
8200 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8201 symbols.
8202
8203 @item renaming symbols
8204 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8205 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8206 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8207 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8208 created). In the following example:
8209
8210 @example
8211 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8212
8213 EXPORTS
8214 _foo = foo
8215 @end example
8216
8217 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8218 @samp{_foo}.
8219 @end table
8220
8221 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8222 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
8223 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8224 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8225 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8226 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8227 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8228 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8229 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8230 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8231 which is probably not what you wanted.
8232
8233 @cindex weak externals
8234 @item weak externals
8235 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8236 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8237 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8238 are three variants of weak externals:
8239 @itemize
8240 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8241 called lazy externals.
8242 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8243 This form is not presently implemented.
8244 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8245 implemented.
8246 @end itemize
8247 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8248 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8249 uses a default value.
8250
8251 @cindex aligned common symbols
8252 @item aligned common symbols
8253 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8254 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8255 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8256 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8257 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8258 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8259 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8260 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8261
8262 @end table
8263
8264 @ifclear GENERIC
8265 @lowersections
8266 @end ifclear
8267 @end ifset
8268
8269 @ifset XTENSA
8270 @ifclear GENERIC
8271 @raisesections
8272 @end ifclear
8273
8274 @node Xtensa
8275 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8276
8277 @cindex Xtensa processors
8278 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8279 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8280 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8281 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8282 example, with the command:
8283
8284 @smallexample
8285 SECTIONS
8286 @{
8287 .text : @{
8288 *(.literal .text)
8289 @}
8290 @}
8291 @end smallexample
8292
8293 @noindent
8294 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8295 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8296 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8297 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8298 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8299 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8300 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8301
8302 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8303 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8304 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8305 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8306 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8307 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8308 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8309 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8310 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8311 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8312 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8313 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8314
8315 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8316 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8317 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8318 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8319 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8320 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8321 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8322 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8323 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8324 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8325 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8326 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8327 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8328 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8329
8330 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8331 control the linker:
8332
8333 @cindex Xtensa options
8334 @table @option
8335 @item --size-opt
8336 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8337 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8338 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8339 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8340 preserve the correctness of the code.
8341 @end table
8342
8343 @ifclear GENERIC
8344 @lowersections
8345 @end ifclear
8346 @end ifset
8347
8348 @ifclear SingleFormat
8349 @node BFD
8350 @chapter BFD
8351
8352 @cindex back end
8353 @cindex object file management
8354 @cindex object formats available
8355 @kindex objdump -i
8356 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8357 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8358 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8359 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8360 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8361 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8362 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8363 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8364 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8365
8366 @cindex BFD requirements
8367 @cindex requirements for BFD
8368 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8369 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8370 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8371 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8372 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8373 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8374 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8375
8376 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8377 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8378 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8379 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8380
8381 @menu
8382 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8383 @end menu
8384
8385 @node BFD outline
8386 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8387 @cindex opening object files
8388 @include bfdsumm.texi
8389 @end ifclear
8390
8391 @node Reporting Bugs
8392 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8393 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8394 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8395
8396 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8397
8398 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8399 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8400 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8401 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8402 @command{ld}.
8403
8404 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8405 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8406
8407 @menu
8408 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8409 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8410 @end menu
8411
8412 @node Bug Criteria
8413 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8414 @cindex bug criteria
8415
8416 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8417
8418 @itemize @bullet
8419 @cindex fatal signal
8420 @cindex linker crash
8421 @cindex crash of linker
8422 @item
8423 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8424 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8425
8426 @cindex error on valid input
8427 @item
8428 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8429
8430 @cindex invalid input
8431 @item
8432 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8433 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8434 object files are correct.
8435
8436 @item
8437 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8438 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8439 @end itemize
8440
8441 @node Bug Reporting
8442 @section How to Report Bugs
8443 @cindex bug reports
8444 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8445
8446 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8447 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8448 recommend you contact that organization first.
8449
8450 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8451 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8452 distribution.
8453
8454 @ifset BUGURL
8455 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8456 @value{BUGURL}.
8457 @end ifset
8458
8459 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8460 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8461 fact or leave it out, state it!
8462
8463 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8464 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8465 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8466 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8467 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8468 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8469 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8470 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8471 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8472 and the most helpful.
8473
8474 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8475 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8476 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8477
8478 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8479 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8480 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8481 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8482
8483 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8484
8485 @itemize @bullet
8486 @item
8487 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8488 the @samp{--version} argument.
8489
8490 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8491 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8492
8493 @item
8494 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8495 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8496
8497 @item
8498 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8499 version number.
8500
8501 @item
8502 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8503 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8504
8505 @item
8506 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8507 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8508 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8509 sufficient.
8510
8511 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8512 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8513
8514 @item
8515 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8516 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8517 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8518 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8519 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8520 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8521 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8522 attachments are best.
8523
8524 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8525 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8526 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8527 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8528 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8529
8530 @item
8531 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8532 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8533
8534 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8535 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8536 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8537 a chance to make a mistake.
8538
8539 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8540 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8541 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8542 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8543 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8544 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8545 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8546 any conclusion from our observations.
8547
8548 @item
8549 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8550 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8551 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8552 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8553 context, not by line number.
8554
8555 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8556 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8557 @end itemize
8558
8559 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8560
8561 @itemize @bullet
8562 @item
8563 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8564
8565 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8566 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8567 changes will not affect it.
8568
8569 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8570 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8571 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8572 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8573
8574 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8575 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8576 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8577 less time, and so on.
8578
8579 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8580 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8581
8582 @item
8583 A patch for the bug.
8584
8585 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8586 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8587 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8588 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8589
8590 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8591 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8592 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8593 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8594 fixed.
8595
8596 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8597 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8598 help us to understand.
8599
8600 @item
8601 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8602
8603 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8604 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8605 @end itemize
8606
8607 @node MRI
8608 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8609 @cindex MRI compatibility
8610 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8611 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8612 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8613 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8614 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8615 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8616 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8617
8618 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8619 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8620 features to make use of them.
8621
8622 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8623 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8624
8625 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8626 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8627 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8628 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8629 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8630
8631 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8632
8633 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8634 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8635 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8636
8637 @table @code
8638 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8639 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8640 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8641 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8642 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8643 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8644 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8645 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8646 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8647 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8648 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8649
8650 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8651 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8652 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8653 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8654
8655 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8656
8657 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8658 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8659 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8660 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8661
8662 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8663 @item BASE @var{expression}
8664 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8665 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8666
8667 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8668 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8669 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8670 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8671
8672 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8673 @item END
8674 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8675
8676 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8677 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8678 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8679 language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
8680
8681 @enumerate
8682 @item
8683 S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8684
8685 @item
8686 IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8687
8688 @item
8689 COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8690 @samp{COFF}
8691 @end enumerate
8692
8693 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8694 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8695 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8696 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8697
8698 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8699 same line, with no change in its effect.
8700
8701 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8702 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8703 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8704 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8705 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8706 command line.
8707
8708 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8709 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8710 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8711 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8712 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8713
8714 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8715 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8716 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8717 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8718 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8719 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8720 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8721 file, in the order specified.
8722
8723 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8724 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8725 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8726 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8727 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8728 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8729
8730 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8731 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8732 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8733 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8734 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8735 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8736 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8737 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8738 @end table
8739
8740 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8741 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8742 @include fdl.texi
8743
8744 @node LD Index
8745 @unnumbered LD Index
8746
8747 @printindex cp
8748
8749 @tex
8750 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8751 % meantime:
8752 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8753 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8754 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8755 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8756 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8757 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8758 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8759 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8760 \page\colophon
8761 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8762 @end tex
8763
8764 @bye
This page took 0.205008 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.